JP2019081087A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration in taste of a game.SOLUTION: The game machine includes main control means for controlling a game, and performance control means for controlling performances related to the game. The main control means includes: lottery game execution means that can execute a lottery game on the basis of entry of a game medium in a winning area in a game area; specific game execution means that, when the lottery game derives a specific result, may execute a specific game; prior determination means capable of determining, before execution of the lottery game, whether or not the lottery game derives the specific result; and game information transmission means that can transmit game information including a prior determination result of the prior determination means, to the performance control means. The specific result includes a plurality of types of a first specific result of actuating a condition device, and a second specific result of not actuating the condition device respectively.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, the result of a variable display game executed based on winning in a specific area of game media is determined in advance (prefetching determination) before execution of the variable display game, and advance notice effect capable of suggesting the result (preread effect) Gaming machines are known. In such a gaming machine, the pre-reading determination is performed by the main control means for controlling the game, and the pre-reading effect is performed by the effect control means for controlling the effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-208006, A

  In the above-described gaming machine, processing is performed to determine the stop result of the symbol at the start of the variable display of the symbol and at the time of prior determination of the degree of expectation. However, since it is necessary to refer to different start information at each determination timing of the stop result of the symbol, there are cases where the determination processing becomes complicated or it is necessary to provide another processing for each determination timing.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of making processing relating to game control common.

  In one representative form of the present invention, start information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, selection of a type of lottery and dynamic display is executed based on the acquired start information, and the selected type is selected. Dynamic display capable of being executed, and controlled to a special gaming state in which the player is given a benefit based on the result of the lottery, wherein the predetermined upper limit is limited before the dynamic display is started And a start information storage means for temporarily storing the start information, and a start for starting the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Dynamic display which temporarily stores information from the hold storage means to the start information storage means, and executes selection of the type of the lottery and the dynamic display based on the start information stored in the start information storage means Time And means for temporarily storing the start information in the start information storage means before the dynamic display is started, and based on the start information stored in the start information storage means, the type of the dynamic display And determining in advance the determination result of the lottery, and the selection of the type of the dynamic display in the dynamic display determination means and the prior determination means is performed using a common process. The present invention is characterized in that the start information stored in the start information storage means is initialized after execution and after the lottery by the prior determination means is performed.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, the above-mentioned problem can be solved, and processing relating to game control can be standardized.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 8, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. 16 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 15 to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special motorized prize control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting opening winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data table at the time of a starting opening prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. It is a flow chart which shows an example of storage pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to notice permission determination data, (A) is a notice permission determination data address table, (B) is an example of notice permission determination data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to a special symbol holding ball number command, (A) is a special symbol holding ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol holding ball number designation command creation table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern selection judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the fluctuation pattern selection determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol / flag setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and a common motorized prize control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of gate passage. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal symbol pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a common drawing pre-reading judgment prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a figure showing an example of module composition of a main control program. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of receiving command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration symbol change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of the random-number extraction range in time-sequential order. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the presentation example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special figure pre-reading effect control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of normal pre-reading effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous pre-reading effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous pre-reading effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous pre-reading effect mode selection table for selecting the aspect (specific effect) of continuous pre-reading effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of continuous pre-reading effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of common drawing pre-reading effect processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a common drawing pre-reading effect. It is an example of a table explaining the detailed contents about the command concerning the special drawing prefetch among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. It is an example of a table explaining the detailed contents about the command concerning the special drawing prefetch among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of storage pre-reading processing of a modification. (A) is an example of a schematic flowchart simplified by focusing on the above-mentioned fluctuation distribution table with fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing (FIG. 29), and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach judgment random number and the comparison value It is an example of the executability table. (A) is an example of the table which shows the conditions which the main control board 4100 of a modification forbids pre-reading, (B) is a figure explaining the effect which forbids pre-reading at the time of state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the receiving command analysis process of the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the modification 1. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process of Modification Example 2. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of an input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the modification 2; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of unknown count processing in received command analysis processing of modification 2; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special-figure prefetching execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the modification 2; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation transition in a definite variation time short state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production mode transfer processing performed by periphery control MPU450a.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of the game hall and a box pivotally supported openably and closably on the outer frame 2. A game board 4 having a game area 1100 having a frame-shaped main frame 3 and a main game frame 3 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front and into which a game ball as a game medium is hit, and the front of the main frame 3 and the game board 4 on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the main body frame 3. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed under the gaming window 101 A tray-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4; And.

  In front view, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction, respectively, and the horizontal widths of the respective frames are substantially the same. The dimension of the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the size of the outer frame 2. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the game area 1100 in which the game balls are hit through the substantially circular game window 101 is exposed, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101 As such, two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are disposed up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play a game. It is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the area 1100, the various winning openings, the special effects, and the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. The outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 4, upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 extending in the lateral direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions, and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 with each other by the connecting members 14 to form a vertically long rectangular ( Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (eg, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. In addition, an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, for example, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in pachinko island facilities of the game hall, etc. The finger of the person makes it easy to hold the pachinko gaming machine 1, and at the same time, the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is disposed so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed to a lower inner predetermined position of the left side frame plate 12 A support fitting 21 and a reinforcement fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front face of the reinforcement fitting 22 It has 23 and. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. A main frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support bracket 21, and the support support 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 is After inserting the main frame 3 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 can be easily locked by locking the support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be pivoted open and close freely.

  Further, in the outer frame 2, two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed to the inner side of the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 1). (See below), and the details will be described later, but by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are The engagement is disengaged, and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided openably and closably on the front side of the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a main frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4 An upper shaft support fitting 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 mounted on the upper end and the lower end of the left side end of the main body frame base 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and rotatably supporting the door frame 5; A ball hitting device 650 attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600 for hitting a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and a back of the main frame base 600 attached to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 When the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3 from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling electrical parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right end of the main frame base in a front view, opening and closing locking of the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2, and locking and closing the door frame 5 to the main frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and is formed so as to have a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. It is done. The main unit frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part; A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the base 600 and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 rearwardly from the lower end of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which the open side outward bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 which protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and which forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves of the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and the upper end regulating rib 609 hanging down from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and having a plurality of lower ends arranged in the left and right direction. And have. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the back direction There is. In addition, the game board locking portion can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Further, the main frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the ball hitting and launching device is on the front right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A striking launcher 650 is mounted from the front side so that the 650 launch solenoids 654 are accommodated in the solenoid accommodating recess. With the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the front of the lower rear wall 604, a far space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the firing rail 660 in the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in a front view. It is supposed to be. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entrance 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 is located below the far space 626. The gaming ball having descended the far space 626 is received by the far ball inlet 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the dish unit 300.

  Also, the main frame base 600 has a plurality of openings formed in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower rear wall 604 in the front-rear direction and a plurality of openings on the upper side and front-rear left and right sides And a through hole 615 penetrating through the The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of 800 are arranged to face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view When the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is supposed to be. Further, a main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the rear side lower than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 will be described. The upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left end upper and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw, so that the door frame 5 is fixed to the main body frame 3 The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of opening and closing.

  The upper shaft support fitting 630 is a plate-like attachment portion 631 attached to the upper side bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631 7, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from near the front end of the front extension 632 and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. (See above) is inserted downward in the vertical direction through which the door frame shaft support hole 634 is inserted and the pivoting end to the open side of the door frame 5 hanging down from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in front view And a stopper. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed on the lower side of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion and a plate-shaped mounting portion extending in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plate-like front extension part 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c which penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension part 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted A stopper 642 d is provided to stand upward from a left end in a front view of the extension portion 642 b and to restrict the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. In the door frame shaft support fitting 642, the mounting portion, the front extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  Further, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion and a plate-like mounting portion extending in the vertical and horizontal directions. A forwardly extending portion 644b is provided, and a body frame shaft support hole vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the forwardly extending portion 644b. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction. The front extension portion 642 b and the front extension portion 644 b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  When the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxial. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is engaged with the support projection 21d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 4). The front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close. It is supposed to be.

  Also, with the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 attached to the body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630 and the door frame support hole of the lower shaft support 640 The door frame is configured such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 with the position 642 c coaxially positioned. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 (see FIG. 7) on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is mounted on the door frame of the upper shaft support fitting 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by inserting the shaft support hole 634 into the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By sliding the shaft pin 155 upward after the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap vertically. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 will be described. The ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is mounted on a lower base of a lower rear wall 604 of the main frame base 600 at a predetermined position on a front surface of a metal plate, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protrudes forward on the lower rear surface of the firing base 652. A firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the rotational drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined position on the movement locus of the tip 658 The tip end of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 attached to the front end of the firing base 660 and the firing rail 660 attached to the front end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a clearance that the game ball can not pass at the same time as it is made possible 662 and a stopper for restricting the pivoting of the hitting ball 656 (the tip 658) to the side of the firing rail 660 than the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopper 662 And 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting and launching apparatus 650 reciprocates and rotates the rotation drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end is at the axial center of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b to which the tip 658 is fixed at the tip with the normal direction directed, and a stopper portion 656c which can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side across the fixing portion 656a with respect to the collar portion 656b; Is equipped. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In a state where the striking device firing device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially at the center in the lateral direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601) is positioned lower than the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction A far space 626 is formed to extend downward. And, the ball hitting device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in a front view. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the far space 626, is received by the far ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the winning ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the gaming balls supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the pachinko island facility are stored, and then the upper tray 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is something to pay out. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the top of the back surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged in the game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent downstream, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 paying out based on the payout instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. The game machine is mainly equipped with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722 of the award ball tank 720, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. One end side of the ball straightening member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and a weight is held therein, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the award ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 includes an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at an upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and a tank continuous with the right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view A ball pressure plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the rail 731 and a ball stopper 735 capable of advancing and retracting into the tank rail 731 and stopping rolling of the gaming ball in the tank rail 731 to the discharge port side And. Two alignment gears 732 are provided in line in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for delivering the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 is open at the upper end and has a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction, and communicates with the lower end of the supply passage and has a predetermined size. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage communicating with the lower end of the distribution space on the rear side (open side) in the rear view and bent in a substantially U shape and opened on the left side in the rear view, a rear view right side of the distribution space And a ball removal passage communicating with the lower end and extending downward and opening at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is engaged with the first gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear to be rotated, the dispensing rotating body integrally rotated with the third gear and disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotating body are integrally rotatably fixed on the opposite side across the third gear, circumferentially A ball breakage switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage, provided with a rotation detection board on which a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals. Holds a count switch 751 for detecting gaming balls flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed on a rotation detection board integrally rotating with the payout rotary body, and a rotation angle switch 752 Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotary body is provided with three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one gaming ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the gaming sphere supplied from the supply passage is 1 by rotation of the payout rotary body. Each ball is accommodated in the recess so that it can be dispensed to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. In addition, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotation body are equally divided (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotation body. The rotational position of the payout rotary body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotational angle switch 752 provided at each position. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 744.

  In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotor is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage are dispensed to the prize ball passage, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the winning ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and delivered to the winning ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member is operated by a store clerk or the like in the hall, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball pulling passage, and the game balls paid out to the ball pulling passage are The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full Tank Branch Unit]
The full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper rear end. A game is performed from the bottom of the prize ball receptacle in the branch space to the front side from the prize ball receptacle which receives the game ball which has flowed down the ball passage, the branch space which is disposed below the prize ball receptacle and extends laterally. The normal passage for guiding the ball, the gaming ball distributed in the normal passage are released forward, and the normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view front view And a full ball outlet 776 that is released forward from the full ball passage 774 and is open on the left side of the ball view 774 in a front view. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball outlet port for receiving gaming balls that have been opened upward at the left end in a front view at the rear end upper portion and flowed down the ball outlet passage of the prize ball device 740; A ball extraction passage for guiding the game ball received in the mouth to the front, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage to the front, and at a position rearward of the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the left end in front view And an open ball outlet.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is normally in communication with the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1), passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540. The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 of the unit 300 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed to communicate with the upper end of the main frame base ball removal passage in the main body frame base 600 in the right side in a rear view, and the game ball released from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the body frame base 600 It is delivered to the base ball removal passage.

  When the gaming ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) with the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 being full of gaming balls, the ball is raised from the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540. The game balls which can not be ejected to the side of the tray 301 stay in the first ball passage of the far cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream of the full ball branch unit 770 is filled up. In this state, the gaming ball that has entered the branch space from the winning ball receptacle can not normally enter the passage, and starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the gaming ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters into the tan passage and is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300 from the full ball outlet through the second ball inlet 542c of the far cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 has a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in a front view, A power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810 and a power supply substrate box attached to the rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a dispensing control substrate box 860 attached to the back surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal substrate box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the dispensing control substrate box 860 in front view And the substrate unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is a discharge ball receiving portion 841 receiving the gaming balls discharged upward and discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 at the front left on the left and right center in front view; It is opened forward and upward at the front of the discharge passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging it, the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) And a box accommodating portion formed such that the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed, flows through the opening of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the body frame base ball removal passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the body frame base 600. The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 can be discharged through the discharge passage 842 to the lower back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It has become.

  The power supply substrate box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components and the like through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the A power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  The delivery control board box 860 includes a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open to the rear, a thin box-like cover 862 that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and is open to the front, and a box base 861 And a payout control substrate 4110 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In the present embodiment, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error release unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like are faced rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 when the power is turned on and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100, or after the power is turned on. When notified of an error, it is operated to clear the error, and the function to clear the RAM when the power is turned on and the time after the power is turned on (a period of playing the function as the RAM clear has passed And the function of canceling the error in A detailed description of this point will be given later.

  Terminal board box 870 has a board base 871 attached to the rear face of speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of board base 871 and peripheral panel relay terminals 872 fixed backward, and a board base A game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the 871 and having the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the back side And a substrate cover 874 covering the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and CR unit relaying The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are provided for the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 for the board unit 800, etc. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decoration board, the operation unit 400 and the like. By attaching the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the board attachment portion formed on the front face of the board unit base 810, the front face of the main body frame base 600 is faced frontward, A wire extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 and the relay terminal board cover 692 Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal board 880 is a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, a touch of the ball lending unit 360 in the bowl unit 300 disposed on the door frame 5 side. The relay 516 relays the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the body frame 3 side. In addition, regarding the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360, the return button 362, the loan remaining display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the release stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the far cover unit 540. The explanation will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in the decoration units 200, 240, 280 and the decoration unit 200 provided on the door frame 5 side, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 , For relaying the connection between various switches for detecting the operation of the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side It is. Note that each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, dial operation Description of various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 has a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer periphery is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertical circular shape (elliptical shape), A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the frame base unit 100 and a left side attached to the left outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200 A decoration unit 240, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And 100. A pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front of the 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the right side of the dish unit 300 The upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470, the handle unit 500 for penetrating the tray unit 300 and attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and sandwiching the door frame base unit 100 A rear cover unit 540 disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the rear cover unit 540, and a door frame Attached to the back side of the base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a game window 101 which is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is vertically long and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is substantially oval in vertical length; An upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the game window 101 at the front of the base body 110 for fixing the upper decoration unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base 110 A speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 for supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A crime prevention cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIG. 1 and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and attached to the rear face of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101 Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided on the potentiometer 512 of the handle unit 500 described later and the game board 4 described later A handle relay terminal board 192 (see FIG. 1) relaying connection with 100, a handle relay terminal board cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal board 192, and a center in the horizontal direction A frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 which is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191, handle relay terminal plate 192, etc. on the opposite side (right side (axial support side) from the center in the horizontal direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body (See FIG. 1) and a frame ornamental drive amplifier substrate cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame ornamental drive amplifier substrate 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140 provided on the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is provided with an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, each decoration board provided in each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, dish unit 300 and operation unit 400, and a dial drive motor provided in operation unit 400. Wires for electrically connecting the switches, the handle relay terminal board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc. with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being collected and bundled at the position of the right side (axial support side), it is extended backward and connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base main body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101 having a vertically elongated inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape is entirely upwardly offset. It is done. The game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. In addition, at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch capable of inserting the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Speaker attachment portion for attaching and fixing the side speaker 130, which is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101, and the right (open side) end of the front which is disposed in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. The handle attachment portion for attaching the handle bracket at a slanted angle so as to retract, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion, the upper side of the handle attachment portion The lock hole 116 is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short in the forward direction and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 150 is provided with an upper reinforcement sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the upper side back surface of the door frame base main body 110 and a pivot support attached along the back side of the pivoting side of the door frame base main body 110. A side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the side of the door frame base main body 110, and a game window 101 of the door frame base main body 110. And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the lower surface of the lower side, and they are formed into a square shape by mutually fastening them with a screw or a rivet.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface. It is equipped integrally. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that abuts on the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided at the rear lower portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 The door frame hook portion is obtained by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2). It is possible to release the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 by disengaging the engagement between the 1041 and the hook cover 165.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The dish unit 300 is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740, and the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 are hit and fired via the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The upper tray upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left to the center in a front view, and from the center to the front in a straight line toward the right. It is formed to protrude. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314 d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and this portion is bent downward, for example, when the player presses the portion downward by hand, When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, so when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the upper tray upper panel 314 receives the force thereof. The upper dish upper panel 314 is bent to prevent the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper dish upper panel 314 is broken first before the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 is broken. When the upper tray upper panel 314 is broken, the tray unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper tray upper panel 314 and attached to the upper tray upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  The tray unit 300 also has an upper tray ball withdrawal mechanism 340 for withdrawing the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball withdrawal button 341, and the lower plate ball withdrawal button 354. The lower ball ball extraction mechanism 350 for extracting the gaming ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b in accordance with the operation of the above, and not shown installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 And a ball unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that the player can rotate and the press operation unit 405 (the player can press). Operation unit), and the operation of the player can be accepted according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, and not only the game ball hitting operation to the player but also , To be able to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for reverse rotation.

4-2-2. Ball unit]
The rental ball unit 360 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a loan remaining display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. When the rental ball button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365 c can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be viewed through the loan remaining display portion 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls are put on the bowl unit by inserting a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. While being able to lend (pay out) in the upper plate 301 of 300, when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount will be returned ing. Further, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball sending unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 one ball at a time, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be It can be withdrawn to the lower tray 302 by the operation of the upper disc ball release button 341 of the removal mechanism 340.

  In the ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharging port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction , And a box-shaped front cover having a ball outlet open to the lower side of the entry opening, and a rear open box-like front cover, and a box form closing the rear end of the front cover and having the front open open, penetrating in the longitudinal direction Back cover having a hitting supply port 582a for supplying the game ball intruded from the entrance of the front cover to the hit ball launcher 650, and pivoting about an axis extending in the longitudinal direction between the back cover and the front cover A ball removing member having a partitioning portion that is pivotally supported so as to partition between the entry port and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member one ball at a time Supply port 582a up and down between front cover and rear cover And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member accepts one game ball while the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member receives The game balls are to be sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 and has a cylindrical handle shape with a front end bulging in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base rotatable relative to the handle base. It is disposed on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, which is fixed on the front of the rotary handle main body, and on the front of the rotary handle main body 506. And a front end cover 508 which is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the rotary handle front 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the rotation center in front of the rotary handle main body, and has a noncircular bearing portion at the rear end and the bearing portion of the shaft member The potentiometer 512 fixed to the front of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 between the handle base and the potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft portion which is made rotatable and fixed to the front of the handle base so as to detect the potentiometer 512 A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at different positions on the rear surface of the switch support member , A single-shot bolt rotatably supported on the switch support member and operating the firing stop switch 518 And a handle disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urging the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body back to the original rotational position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is used to electrically adjust the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front handle 506. In addition, the rotation handle body front 506 and the rotation handle body are rotated from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in front view. Do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotary handle main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes in accordance with the rotational position (rotational angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle after the main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotational position after the rotary handle main body 506 and the rotary handle main body There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls are paid out from the winning ball unit 700, and the game is played regardless of being fired by the ball striking device 650. The game balls (fowl balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base which is open on the front side and has a flow passage of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover which closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the false cover unit 540 is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and extends through the first ball inlet 542a penetrating in the front-rear direction and the first ball inlet and extends to the front right of the cover base 542 A single ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c disposed on the outer side (right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a, and a second ball passage in communication with the cover base And a second ball inlet 542 c inclined so as to extend downward and lower toward the lower right corner in the front view. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage of the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the predetermined amount of gaming ball is A storage space that can be stored is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is disposed at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and opens in the upper direction to the far ball inlet 542e, and the far ball inlet 542e communicates with the ball ball to the upper near the downstream of the second ball passage. And a ball passage. In addition, the cover base is provided with an opening and closing operation piece for operating the opening and closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening and closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening and closing crank in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to rotate the opening and closing crank to open the opening and closing shutter 792. It can be in the open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed at the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front and back direction An outlet and a second ball outlet disposed at the lower right corner in a front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper countersink supply port of the tray unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. In addition, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower bowl ball supply rod in the bowl unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 receives the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a and passes through the first ball passage to the first ball outlet 300 It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet, through the second ball passage from the second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 via the lower tray and the lower tray inlet of the tray unit 300.

  Further, when the door cover 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the far ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3, so that the ball hitting and launching apparatus can be used. When the game ball fired by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the gaming ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the fowl cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in a front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be pivotable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 for detecting swinging of the swinging member, and a spring for biasing the swinging member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550 are provided. The lower end of the swinging member is pivotally supported by the cover base so that the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and the left side wall of the accommodation space is substantially vertical. It is supposed to form. Further, the swinging member is biased to a substantially vertical position by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the storage space is full with the stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 and FIG. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 disassembled and viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the player operates the handle device 500 to operate the handle device 500 in the game area 1100 into which the game ball as a game medium is hit. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that partitions the outer periphery, and a position where the player can see from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko game machine 1 at the front right lower corner of the front component 1110 And a plurality of openings 1158 attached to the back of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating the front and back in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. And a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150, and the game panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  In addition, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a light emitting decorative hole formed in a plurality so as to penetrate the game panel 1150 A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image which is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can be viewed from the player according to the gaming state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. The main control substrate box 1170 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the rear side.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The front component 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the region 1100 is divided. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  In the front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is a firing rail 660 (FIG. 1) It is located on the extension of (see). A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning it to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball which has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100 if it is not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 etc. It is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4 .

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 and the lower space between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111. 1 (see FIG. 1) is received by the ball entry 542e (see FIG. 1) of the far cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626, It is discharged to the lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7).

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced, and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  Further, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end of the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and vertically spaced at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 disposed, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, In the vicinity of the left side end portion of the second embodiment, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage notch portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3, thereby referring to the game board holding port 601 (FIG. 5). Can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction at the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is engaged with the game board By locking the stop portion, it is possible to restrict the front end right end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the game board fixture 690 (FIG. 5) is supported. The fixed piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted when the front panel is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the game board 4 The lower end of the is restricted to move forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  A function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front component 1110 in a front view.

5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 is disposed on the upper side of the out port 1151 at the lower center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the front of the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 disposed along the front of the game panel 1150 and supported by the front of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center character 2300 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. There is.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed at the position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, A portion protruding to the front side relative to the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. Thereby, the front unit 2000 is in contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and the movement of the game ball is performed together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front of the game panel 1150. Change can be given. Further, the front unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. Attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which gaming balls driven into gaming area 1100 can be received, and more specifically, it is arranged approximately at the center in the horizontal direction. A starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening 2102 disposed below the upper starting opening 2101, and a rectangular opening disposed below the lower starting opening 2102 and extending in the lateral direction more than the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 A shape special winning opening 2103 and a general winning opening 2104 disposed slightly upward of the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls accepted by the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, and gaming balls can be always accepted (prize winning). On the other hand, the lower starting opening 2102 disposed below the upper starting opening 2101 has a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be expanded by the starting opening solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) between the lower starting opening 2101 and the upper starting opening 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 are erected substantially vertically, the game ball can not be received by the upper start opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 to the lower start opening 2102, but the pair of movable When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the gaming ball can be received to the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the lower starting opening 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. Note that the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center combination 2300 described later.

  The winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2107 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening and closing member 2107 is pivotally supported, and in the substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive the game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it rotates, the special winning opening 2103 can be opened to make it easy to receive the game ball. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is accepted (start winning) by the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit") opens and closes by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 (see Figure 99), variable winning opening (variable winning device) Are configured.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and gaming balls can always be accepted (winning).

  Also, although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls received to the lower starting opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting gaming balls received to the big winning opening 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is further discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. In addition, an upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects gaming balls received to the upper starting opening 2101 and a general winning opening switch 3020 that detects gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. .

5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 to which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction in the game panel 1150 Above, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 1150, and is made to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in front view in the attacker unit 2100 A general winning hole 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward and gaming balls can always be accepted (winning), and the gaming balls accepted to the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After it is detected, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is disposed at a position such that the left end thereof is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end thereof, and is inclined to become lower toward the right end. The shelf 2202 and the first shelf 2202 are disposed on the opposite side and lower side across the two general winning openings 2201 and the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 And the second shelf 2203 is lowered toward the side of 2103), and the game ball having flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202 may be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  The two general winning openings 2201 are disposed to the right of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the first shelf 2202 moves the game ball toward the center of the game area 1100, There is a possibility of winning to the general winning opening 2201. In addition, the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 is also provided with a third shelf 2204 inclined so as to be lower toward the center side of the game area 1100.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to be translucent as a whole, and although a detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration substrate 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is disposed on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. There is a light emitting decoration.

5-2-3. Center feature]
Next, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The center character 2300 is inserted from the front side to the opening 1158 which is formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is then fixed to the front of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is arc-shaped to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball with the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100. While being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line hanging down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 1100.

  This center character 2300 is inclined to the left from the position slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall located on the front of the game panel 1150. And when the game ball is driven to the upper part in the game area 1100, the game ball flows down through the left side of the center character 2300 when flowing down to the upper shelf 2301, and the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball which has flowed down (entered) is made to flow down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center character 2300. That is, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball intrudes to the right of the upper shelf 2301 in the center character 2300, chances of enjoying the flow of the game ball are reduced, so the game ball is strongly hit. It is possible to adjust the size of the game as appropriate, and to maintain tension and prevent the player from becoming a random game.

  In addition, the center character 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the gaming panel 1150 Warp outlet (not shown) for releasing the gaming ball into the frame, and after rolling the gaming ball released from the warp outlet in the left and right direction, it is released into the upper game area 1100 of the attacker unit 2100 and a center part And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame 2300.

  The stage 2310 in this center character 2300 is not shown in detail but a first stage to which gaming balls discharged from the warp outlet are supplied, and a gaming ball from the first stage which is disposed in front of the first stage And a second stage which is supplied and capable of releasing game balls into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 where the game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance of the lowermost front face in the center character 2300 It is discharged from the outlet 2314 into the game area 1100. This chance outlet 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming balls released from the chance outlet 2314 are accepted (winning) in the upper starting opening 2101 with high probability. ing.

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center character 2300 is formed of a transparent member so that the decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be viewed by the player through the stage 2310 It has become.

  In addition, the center character 2300 is transparent on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150 above the warp entrance 2302 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 and transparent. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in the form of a thin plate substantially from the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which the game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game balls driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center character 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 are made to flow downstream through the back side of the arch portion 2315. .

  Further, the center character 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of gaming balls in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the gaming panel 1150. The gate unit 2350 is disposed on the upper side of the arch unit 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall, and detects the gate entrance to which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter and the game ball entering the gate entrance And a gate outlet for releasing the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the gaming ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. The section 2315 looks as if it were a dive.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 is a plurality of light emission formed in the game area 1100 in the game area 1150 at a position outside the opening 1158 where the center character 2300 is inserted, in a circular or x shape to penetrate in the front-rear direction The decorative holes are lighted and decorated. The panel lens member 2500 is disposed on the surface of the transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center character 2300 and on the surface of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center character 2300, and a rear panel of the lower panel lens 2520 And a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-like lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-like insertion light guides substantially in the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a department. In the state where this insertion light guide part is inserted from the rear side to the light emission decoration hole of game panel 1150, the tip is formed so as to substantially match the front surface of game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of game panel 1150 It does not affect the ball as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can emit light and decorate the area where the game balls flow down even with the opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate As well as being able to show the player the decoration of the game panel 1150 which has never been done, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made to stand out to make it possible to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game panel 1150, and the back box 3001 supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position spaced back from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, Upper unit 3100 disposed on the upper side of device 1900, character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of liquid crystal display device 1900 in back box 3001, and gear decoration disposed on the left side of liquid crystal display device 1900 in back box 3001 It mainly comprises a body unit 3500.

  Further, back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to side winning opening member 2200 in front unit 2000 attached to the front of game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front A side lamp decorative substrate 3014, a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and accepted to the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game accepted to the left general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward and a right that is disposed on the right of the left guiding member 3016 and guides the gaming ball received downward to the upper starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Furthermore, although the back unit 3000 is not shown in detail, it is disposed under the lamp drive board box 3423 and the lamp drive board box 3423 which is disposed in the lower rear of the back box 3001 and accommodates the lamp drive board 4170. The motor drive board box 3430, which is disposed on the side and houses the motor drive board 4180, is fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and is disposed on the left side in a rear view of the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally elongated rectangular upper resistance substrate disposed on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. And are further provided.

  In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center character 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 is formed into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., enables the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be characterized. Also, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, and 3500 can move independently or in linkage with each other according to the game state, and the movement of the back unit 3000 changes the game state with respect to the player. It is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity or the like, and to entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in the shape of a box whose front side is open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. In the back box 3001, a rectangular opening is formed substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player through this opening. Furthermore, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, and 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, although not shown, back box 3001 inserts and locks fixed piece 1902 on one side (right side in rear view) projecting outward from the left and right sides of liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in rear view. The liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached on the left side in the rear view of the opening, and the other side (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

5-4-2. Induction member]
Next, the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 respectively through different flow paths. A general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of gaming balls is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides the game balls received to the upper starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the right general winning opening 2104 downward to the vicinity of the lower end and is discharged downward through different flow paths. An upper starting opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow passage corresponding to the upper starting opening 2101, and a general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow passage corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The gaming balls guided downward by the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and are discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 downward to the game board 4 It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is generally formed in a horizontally long shape, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and is a lifting and lowering mechanism for lifting and lowering the rotatable decoration unit 3200 disposed on the rear side of the rotatable decoration unit 3200 and the rotatable decoration unit 3200 in front view 3250, a swing decoration unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the lateral direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decoration unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decoration unit 3200 can be vertically moved by the lifting mechanism 3250 between the rising position located at the top of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the lowering position located approximately at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. The rotary ornament unit 3200 is configured to rotate a rotary ornament formed in a shuriken shape disposed on the front surface, and when it rotates, the rotation radius of the rotary ornament is expanded by the centrifugal force. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative unit 3200 not only rotates the rotary decorative unit to the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary decorative unit is enlarged and the appearance is largely changed. It is possible to make the player have a strong impact, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game while attracting the player's interest strongly It is possible to make it easy to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines and played.

  The swing decoration unit 3300 includes swing decoration bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotation decoration unit 3200 positioned at the raised position, and the left and right swing decoration is made according to the gaming state. The body can be swung simultaneously in the left and right direction.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with a plate-like ceiling decoration that extends horizontally in the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction around the front end side, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decorative body is turned downward according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 is provided with a character body that is modeled on a ninja and three-dimensionally shaped, and moves in the left and right direction from the position of the right end to the position closer to the center side from the position of the right end. It is possible to In addition, when moving in the left-right direction, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the vertical direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around the axis where the head extends in the lateral direction, and reciprocate around the axis where the right arm extends in the vertical direction. It is possible to Thus, by turning the head back and forth, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character were crawling. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to cause the character to perform an action as if throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decorative body unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decorative body unit 3500 includes a plurality of gear decorative bodies that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction and arranged in a plurality in the vertical direction, and the respective gear decorative bodies are simultaneously in accordance with the gaming state. It is supposed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral substrate box 1905 in which the peripheral control substrate 4140 is accommodated at the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted.

[6. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 and disposed. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko gaming machine.

  The function display unit 1180 is, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 10, a game state display made up of one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view And a special symbol memory indicator 1184 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 consisting of the unit 1183, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of the gaming state indicator 1183; A special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED arranged on the right of the special symbol memory display 1184 and displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 as a first special symbol The display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1185 arranged on the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and drawn by receiving the game ball to the lower starting opening 2102 Lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of lower special symbol display 1186, lower start opening A lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding acceptance of the game ball to 2102 is provided.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game ball. And a normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs, and arranged under the normal symbol memory display, for displaying a normal lottery result selected as the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 as a normal symbol Opening and closing of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged side by side to the diagonal upper right side of the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (the number of rounds).

  The game state indicator 1183 is a full color LED capable of changing its light emission color of red, green and orange, and various game states (a combination of a light emission color to emit light and lighting and blinking) For example, it is possible to display a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a definite variation time short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, and the like.

  The upper special symbol memory display 1184 suspends the start of the variable display when the gaming ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101 when the first special symbol can not be changed and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The stored number of stored first special symbols is displayed. This special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b, depending on the lighting / flashing pattern of the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a, 1184b. , Can be displayed the number of reservations. Specifically, for example, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off when the number of holdings is one, and the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both turned on when the number of holdings is two. The special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of reservations is three, and the special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both blink when the number of reservations is four. There is. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of the variable display when the gaming ball is received in the lower starting opening 2102 when the second special symbol can not be changed and displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186 ( The stored number of stored second special symbols is displayed. The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b, depending on the lighting / flashing patterns of the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b. , Can be displayed the number of reservations. Specifically, for example, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of reservations is one, and the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned on when the number of reservations is two. The lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up when the number of reservations is three, and the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both blink when the number of reservations is four. There is. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 The 7-segment LED is stopped after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is played by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the 7-segment LED stopped. Can be made to be recognized by the player (variable display game).

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full color LED capable of changing its light emission color of red, green and orange, and by combining the light emission color to emit light and lighting and blinking, the gate 2350 is played It is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by passing a ball. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol memory display 1188 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol whose start of the variable display is reserved (stored) The number of reservations (the number of memories) is displayed. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of reservations. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present embodiment, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 is provided with a two-round indicator lamp 1190a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a fifteen-round indicator lamp 1190b, and the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be indicated by lighting each lamp It is supposed to be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 There is. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round indicator 1190 is attached to the front of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. Have the store clerks in the hall recognize the position of function display unit 1180 without confusion So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. 14 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on and performs the game operation. The main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as main control programs to control and ROMs storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, The apparatus is mainly provided with a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors a sign of a stop.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") in main control MPU 4100a. In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a non-volatile storage unit. In this non-volatile storage means, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. . Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract the ID code from the non-volatile storage unit and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function without a reset terminal is not provided And consists of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb has the information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 8, an upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls entering the upper starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls entering the lower starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Also, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate unit 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting gaming balls having entered the general winning opening 2201, and a special winning opening 2103 A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls and a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet are panel relays attached to the game board 4 A terminal plate 4161 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100 a through the main control input circuit 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function A control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting opening solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca through the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191, the upper special symbol display 1185, Special symbol indicator 1186, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183 and round indicator 1190 drive signals Output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100 ca with reset function, the main control output with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. As the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and passes frequently through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 The detection of gaming balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, as the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch with a long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. The payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of pachinko gaming machine 1 from payout control board 4110 as serial data by main control input circuit 4100b, whereby the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main cycle serial transmission port 4100ae etc. which is one of various main control serial I / O ports is connected to the bus 4100ah. It is connected via a circuit. The main rotation serial transmission port 4100 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100 aea, a transmission buffer register 4100 aeb, and a serial management unit 4100 aec. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data is started. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. The main control CPU core 4100aa sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 continuously by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting the plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to the method of transmitting as serial data, but may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as program processing, and is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the command is stored in the ring buffer or the condition that it is stored). Thus, individual commands may be transmitted at the required timing.

  Power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It describes.) It is equipped with BC0. The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control MPU 4100a to completely erase it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 performs peripheral control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4150, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for performing drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 And a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies a date and time information that specifies hours, minutes, and seconds, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 The sound that is adjusted by turning the knob, such as music and sound effects, flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining the screen to be drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900, emission of various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal is input) Manage schedule data, etc. that define aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c storing various information (eg, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state), information for managing a special effect flag, etc. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the backup power is supplied by a large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 851. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 851, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is out of control, and when the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it does not reset.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the operation unit 400 and a pressure detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 The detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, frame It is input to the operation unit detecting serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 4150e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It comprises an / O port 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac via the internal bus 4150 ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae and WDT 4150 af Various data are read / written to / from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, and WDT 4150 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 4150 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 4150 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150 b, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad and external bus 4150 h are used for storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150 b, peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150 ad and the peripheral bus 4150 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control. Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 4150 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the movable body detection data from the game board serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for motor drive board of peripheral control MPU 4150a, or the upper decoration in the door frame 5 It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and when the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a is turned, the resistance value is changed, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob portion The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) so as to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 Music and sound effects are made to flow from the provided speaker 130. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an injustice against the pachinko gaming machine 1 (For example, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be rendered more powerful, or it may be notified that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, or the like. Notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. And the volume control from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even if the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating In the mode, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to produce the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-2-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 is defined. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers are specified for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, but they may be copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 4150b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 4150c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. The brightness setting information is, as will be described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance is 85% which is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and lighted.

[7-2-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. Management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copied various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and peripheral control ROM 4150b The various control program copy area 4150 cd, which exclusively stores the copied various control programs, and the various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b A control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data for exclusive use, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among the various information updated by the execution of the control program A work area 4150 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged object work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc, the power on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. And instructs to start the state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) When it is) it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150 ca is various information that is updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs It consists of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 4150 cb to backup second area 4 150 cc to be described later are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that it is ready to accept the screen data from V. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning) "(1 ms)" will be described later. As the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, it is added to “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” respectively. (The effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab, a reception command storage area 4150 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 4150 cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and receives various received commands. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (a part of the RTC 4165 a described later). A storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165 aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150 cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100 a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b to various control data copy areas 4150 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, etc. It is done. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 ca The various information (for example, the operation unit 400) which acquired the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided are set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, and the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1 ms). The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. The door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage region 4150 cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf are opened on the door side. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 4150 cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the processing is advanced based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 ca. In the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and to be stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is operated to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, backup 1st area 4150cb manages Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 4150 cc, Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The data is copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 cb has a total of two pairs of the Bank 1 (1 fr) and the Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and the Bank 1 (1 ms) and the Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 4150cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the first backup area 4150 cb and the second backup area 4150 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a includes a backup management target work area 4150 da for exclusive storage of information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 4150 db and a second backup area 4150 dc are provided, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is a power on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure). RAM clear effect start and each state effect start are instructed (for example, the start of effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power on or Not even zero clear). This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state etc.) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c are not displayed at all, and can not be cleared in the setting mode, while they can be cleared. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150 da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 4150 db to backup second area 4 150 dc described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” And “Bank 4” respectively (the same applies to the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

  Next, a backup first area 4150 db and a backup second area 4150 dc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150 dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of the page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and a backup second area An area 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the head and the end of each page, that is, at the head and the end of the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc.

7-2-2. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control Unit]
Loudspeaker of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the drawing control of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the music and sound effect flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") for sound control such as music and sound effects. A sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470, and display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the displayed screen; It includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, image data for indication of an indication used to indicate an indication indicating that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400 should be operated, the main unit frame viewed from the player Main frame back image data used to display the main frame back image where the position of each part on the back of 3 can be viewed, service mode screen image data used to display the service mode screen, and break timer setting used to display the break timer setting screen Screen image data and screen image data during a break used for displaying a screen during a break are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The start screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 After extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae Output to VDP4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4150a starts the sound command data of the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and the sound command data at the top of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control. After extracting from various control data copy area 4150ce of RAM 4150c and outputting it to VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, schedule data storage triggered by V blank signal being input The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c Output to the built-in VDP4160a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives the V blank signal as the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

7-2-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extraction of character data on the side and upper dish character data to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470, synchronization between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 is achieved. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and Image data for the liquid crystal display 470 is on the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM of drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470. It is the data to generate above.

  Further, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 up from the channel CH2. When output to the plate-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later in response to the input of the V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470. Also, in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from main control board 4100, sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number It sets output channels and serializes music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated to adjust the Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as a sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and operated by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and amplifies the amplified effect sound as audio data The audio data transmission IC 4160 c is designed to output the data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the speaker volume 820 provided on the main body frame 3 is amplified by the master volume value. The volume of the sound flowing from the speakers housed in and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker 130 provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated, serializes this amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c for the notification sound. Are the sound data of the notification sound incorporated into the used track and the sound of the notification sound incorporated into the used track The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually synthesized by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value to adjust the Amplify up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from a speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and amplify the amplified notification sound into audio data as audio data Output to transmission IC 4160 c.

  Here, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1. A brief description will be given of the control for sending an alarm sound to notify a store clerk or the like in the wrongdoing. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually provided on the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows as the sound that flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5 in practice. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the effect sound is for the aforementioned sound generation Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the time period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute so far is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a and adjusting the substrate volume It is set again as the volume value (in this case, when the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub The speaker and the speaker frame provided in the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3). So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  As described above, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the notification sound flows in order to notify the store clerk of the hall against the illegal activity against the sound, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided to the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 Since the effect sound that has become muffled is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data although it flows from the speaker 130, the speaker which is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of a notification sound elapses And when the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 does not flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

7-2-2b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b draws on the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and on the display area of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-2-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-2-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds, is configured around an RTC 4165a, as shown in FIG. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Based on the above, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device 470 can be deployed. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 if it is December 25 or if it is New Year's Eve The screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in steps of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper-dish-side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a only performs ON / OFF control or ON of the backlight. It is supposed to

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as display tests of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is inputted in the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted on the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information etc. stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright in the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side liquid crystal when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, and identifies calendar information Acquire the time information that specifies minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range in which the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on and the current date, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% to the correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 0b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

7-2-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a rotates the knob such as the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak has the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (the sound source built-in VDP 4160a) so as to obtain the volume set in the substrate volumes 0-6 Music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 130.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sound for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1; It announces the contents about the game effect etc. (For example, it is highly probable that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player is high. And so forth)) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4 with built-in sound source) by program. So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even if the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating In the mode, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound and to add to music and sound effects to create a more powerful screen developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470, which is advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, and the rendering sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 or the pressure operation unit 405 There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame 3 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is entered, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is made. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and this screen is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted by the store clerk and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, The volume can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted in the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the operation unit 400 A desired volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer, the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly operating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player adjusting the volume so small that it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and the last time a user sits down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the player who was playing a game feels loudly and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game controls the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400 this time It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). Also, these various commands include effect related commands for performing control of effects performed by the peripheral control board 4140, notification related commands for notifying occurrence of an error, and the like.

  Various commands, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, special drawing 1 tuning production related, special drawing 2 tuning production related, jackpot related, power on, spread drawing tuning production related, general electric part production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[8-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 15, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, special figure 1 symbol type, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and a command with the name of fluctuation state designation, etc., regarding the upper special symbol display 1185 are configured. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) Specifically, as shown in FIG.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is an instruction to start the special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is an instruction to finish special figure 1 tuning effect, the variation state specification command is a gaming state (high probability state, time saving at the start of variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) It is a command which shows a game state etc.). The fluctuation state specification command has a value corresponding to each of the gaming state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of fluctuation or when the gaming state is switched. Further, the special figure 1 tuning effect related command includes a special figure 1 fluctuation type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying a fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when special symbol 1 fluctuation start, special figure 1 design classification command is transmitted immediately after special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). In addition, the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol classification command. The special figure 1 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 15, of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a special edition 2 command of the end of tuning effect termination and the like, regarding the lower special symbol display 1186, are configured. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Specifically, as shown in FIG.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is an instruction to start the special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end command is an instruction to finish the special figure 2 tuning effect. Further, as in the case of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 variation type command (status "B3H", mode "01H to 10H") for specifying the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern is included.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special figure 2 symbol classification command is transmitted immediately after special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, special figure 2 tuning effect The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Further, as described above, similarly to the case of the special view 1, the variation state specifying command is similarly transmitted immediately after the special view 2 symbol type command in the case of the special view 2. The special figure 2 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 15, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is starting while the big winning opening 1 is open for the 1st to 16th rounds (shown in FIG. 8, of the attacker unit 2100 During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103, the large winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the opening of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100 During the closing between 2103 rounds or the start of closing), the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11, It is to convey the ball number of the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103, and the big hit ending command is the big hit endin Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  In the big hit ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the big hit. For example, if the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability non-short playing state, set the mode value to "01H", and if the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability short playing state, "04 H" to the mode value The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Further, even if the game state after the big hit is the same, a plurality of endings may be designated. For example, in the case where the gaming state is high probability non-short game state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery, so the main control board 4100 side may have high probability of high probability ending or low ending May be specified. At this time, the end may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without designating the ending in the big hit ending command.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (when the small winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened or opened at the small hit) The small hit count display command is a small hit middle large winning opening winning combination (in the case of small hit, when the game ball entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large for attacker unit 2100 Sent to the opening of the Nth round of the winning opening 2103), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent to the closing of the special winning opening 1 (closing start of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), the big winning The mouth 1 count display command is when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the gaming ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is a count switch Sent when the jackpot is detected by the 2110) and the jackpot ending command is Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is sent at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent at the small hit open (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), small The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entering the large opening 2103 in the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), the small hitting ending command is Sent at the start of small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
The division of power on, as shown in FIG. 15, is composed of various commands named power on. In this power on command, “D * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The power on command is to instruct start of RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, to instruct start of effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power on) is there).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at the time other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power outage, and the main control side power on process, which will be described later, is executed and the periphery of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process. A power on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The regular-tune-related performance relation is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal symbol display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common figure tuning production start, common design designation, common figure tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1189. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The common drawing tuning effect start command instructs the common drawing tuning effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for specifying a short opening, a long opening, and a long opening, The popular figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the regular pattern tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for indicating the probability and the time saving state.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related to the pair relates to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Opening, Common Power Release Display, and Ending, Common Drawing. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 State or when it is expanded), and the ending command per common figure indicates the start of ending per common figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (When expanding in the left and right direction), the ending command per common drawing is transmitted at the beginning of the ending per common drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the information display divisions are composed of commands of names such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. ing. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG.

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if there is no big hit) When the count switch 2110 detects the start of notification of a winning abnormality, the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a route between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it instructs the start of connection abnormality notification. For example, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110 This command instructs the start of the open circuit / short circuit error display when the open circuit / short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door opening command is opened to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door opening switch inputted through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. If the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame closing command instructs the door frame 5 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in the state, the door open notification end is instructed. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch inputted through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The main body frame open command is issued when the main body frame is closed, and the main body frame close command is closed to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame open switch. When it is determined that the camera is in the closed state, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormal display command is outputted from the main control board 4100 as a payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of the magnetic detection switch abnormality display commands is detected when the magnetic detection switch 3024 detects an abnormality. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), and the door frame is opened. The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch), the main body frame The closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
The test-related section is composed of various commands named test, as shown in FIG. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is determined in advance by the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in Inspection of various substrates such as the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-10. Other]
The other divisions, as shown in FIG. 16, are starting opening winning, variable shortening operation termination designation, high probability termination designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. In these various commands, “9 * H” and “5 * H” are assigned as status, and “** H” (“H” represents hexadecimal) is assigned as mode (“*” indicates And is predetermined according to the contents of the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The starting opening winning combination command instructs the start of the starting opening winning arrangement, and when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, a winning combination to the starting opening is instructed. The fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening inoperative state. The high probability end designation command instructs a state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 memory command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol display The number of balls that have not been used yet (held number)) is conveyed. The special symbol 2 memory command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol. The number of balls that have not been used yet (held number)) is conveyed. The normal symbol memory command is normally used to change the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 by the game ball passing through the gate 2350 shown in FIG. Not the number of balls (number of pending)).

  The special symbol 1 hold number specification command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number increases (when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the hold number increases). The special symbol 2 hold number specification command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation hold ball number increases (when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the hold number increases). Also, the special symbol 1 hold count specification command and the special symbol 2 hold count specification command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and read ahead when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". Indicates no If the special symbol 1 hold number specification command is pre-read, the special symbol 1 hold is read prior to being used to display special symbols at the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191. (1) An instruction to start a pre-reading effect is given to notify the advance notice of the display result by the special symbol display 1185 based on the hold. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 hold number designation command has pre-reading, it is read before the special symbol 2 hold is used to display the special symbol in the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191. It instructs the start of the pre-reading effect of notifying the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 suspension. The symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command and the variation type pre-reading command are transmitted at the time of sending the special symbol holding number specifying command. It should be noted that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol holding number specifying command is read ahead.

  The symbol type pre-reading command designates out-of-sight at the time of pre-reading, specified big hit, non specified big hit. The variation pattern pre-reading command is for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern) in a mode at the time of pre-reading. The fluctuation type prefetch command is for specifying the fluctuation type in the mode at the time of prefetching.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is read by normal symbol display based on the normal symbol hold before it is read before the normal symbol hold is used to change the normal symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 1189 of the function display board 1191 It is instructed to start the pre-reading effect of notifying the advance notice of the display result. Also, with regard to the ordinary symbols, an ordinary symbol storage command corresponding to the pre-reading, an ordinary symbol type pre-reading command and an ordinary symbol variation pattern pre-reading command may be prepared. In addition, unless it refuses in particular, when it is set as "pre-reading", it shall refer to pre-reading of a special symbol.

  Also, in the case of executing pre-read determination, as described later, the same processing as at the start of fluctuation is performed to generate a command including effect patterns and symbols, but when the same command as at the start of fluctuation is transmitted, Since the peripheral control board 4140 which has received the command can not distinguish whether it is at the start of fluctuation or at the time of winning opening winning, only the status value is changed with the mode value being the same.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning time (when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening switch The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109) The variation reduction operation end specification command transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in 5 to notify of that with voice is at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined which has settled the fluctuation reduction of the specified number of times. Sent back). The high probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined, which is obtained by digesting the high probability frequency in the case of “high probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 memory command is used to change the special symbol display on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 In the state where there is not the number of reservations, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 further and the number of reservations increases, or from the number of reservations the upper special symbol indicator 1185 is used for the fluctuation display of the special symbol Sent when the number of reservations decreases. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to change the special symbol at the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the special symbol indicator 1186 In the state where there is not the number of reservations, when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 further and the number of reservations increases, or from the number of reservations, it is used for the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the lower special symbol indicator 1186 Sent when the number of reservations decreases. Normal symbol memory command is normal symbol 1 operation pending ball number change (The game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the number of pendings not used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 In the presence of, when the game ball passes gate part 2350 further and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases because it is used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with the normal symbol display 1189 from the number of reservations Sent to). The normal symbol holding number specification command which changes depending on the presence or absence of pre-reading as well as the special symbol may be transmitted for the normal symbol as well. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of pre-reading is indicated by the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of holding increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  Furthermore, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, it may be divided into the normal pattern variation pattern and the normal symbol pre-reading command and sent, like the normal symbol variation pattern pre-reading command and the normal symbol type pre-reading command. . In this embodiment, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol hold number specification command, but it is not necessary to limit to that, and if it is determined in advance, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is normal It may be sent prior to the symbol holding number specifying command. The same applies to the case of transmitting a prefetching command relating to a variation pattern of a normal symbol (normal symbol variation pattern prefetching command) and a symbol type of a normal symbol (normal symbol type prefetching command) instead of the normal symbol type prefetching effect command.

  By the way, as described above, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the starting opening winning command is from the lower starting opening switch 2109. (When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly with voice Although transmitted to notify the effect, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specification of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to audio notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, monitoring for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity It is a thing of the specification that it uses also for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the speaker provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 simply by the peripheral control board 4140 simply receiving the starting opening prize command. There is also a thing of the specification which does not alert | report by audio | voice from 130.

  In addition to the above-described commands, for example, a gaming machine related information command for transmitting gaming machine related information including model information of a gaming machine may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined trigger. The peripheral control board 4140 having received the gaming machine related information command can execute the effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, in the case where there is a model for executing pre-reading effect based on normal symbol holding and a model not for performing pre-reading effect, the main control board always transmits an ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command to peripheral control board 4140. Then, when it is determined that peripheral control board 4140 is a model capable of executing pre-reading effect based on normal pattern holding based on the gaming machine related information command, normal symbol type pre-reading effect transmitted from main control board 4100 While the command is processed as a valid command to make it possible to execute the regular drawing prefetching effect, when it is determined that the model is a model in which the common model prefetching effect can not be performed, the command is discarded as an invalid command. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to share the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there is a model that can execute the common-play look-ahead effect and a model that can not be performed.

  The main control board 4100 transmits the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process (one of steps S10 to S46 in FIG. 17) executed only once at the time of power on. Good, trigger a timer interrupt process execution multiple times during the game (at the time of starting opening winning, variation start, big hit (if it is a common figure, hit), when a predetermined condition is established such as changing the gaming state) Periodic timing) may be transmitted. The transmission at the time of power-on may be performed as long as the execution of the process at the time of power-on is a trigger, and it is not limited to the transmission during the process of the power-on. For example, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and steady processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after processing at power on is completed is stored in the command buffer It also includes that the specified gaming machine related information command is transmitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, if it is an effect that can be executed on the peripheral control board 4140, it is processed as an effective command, and an effect that can not be executed is It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even when the effects to be executed differ depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is possible to share the control program of the main control board 4100, and develop the control program of the main control board 4100 for each model. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to shorten the development period and to shorten the test period in the testing organization.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then each process such as the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

9-1. Various random numbers]
A big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as various random numbers used for game control, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number A random number for determining initial value for judgment, a random number for reach judgment to be used to decide whether or not to generate reach when no jackpot gaming state is generated, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the display 1186, and derived by an upper special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol display 1186 when generating a big hit gaming state For the jackpot symbol used to determine the jackpot symbol random number used to determine the displayed jackpot symbol and the initial value of this jackpot symbol random number Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. In addition, the random number for big hit symbols mentioned above is a random number for small hit symbols used for determination of the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit gaming state Also used as. On the other hand, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol initial value determination random number is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Also, in addition to these random numbers, an ordinary symbol determination random number for use in determining whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 and an initial value for this ordinary symbol determination random number for determination A random number for determining an initial value per normal symbol determination, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on a regular symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware (random number generation circuit) incorporated in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical range (from the minimum value to the maximum value) In the present embodiment, updating is performed according to a certain rule so that all values appear within the value 0 to the value 32767 as the minimum value. In this way, it is possible to extract an unbiased random value. Further, the random number value is updated based on an internal system clock of 10 MHz obtained by dividing the 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator by 2 by the main control MPU 4100 a. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the arrangement of the random number sequence of the new cycle is updated to be different from the random number sequence of the other cycle. As described above, since the arrangement of the random number sequences generated for each cycle is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  The aforementioned random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the minimum value 0 to the maximum value 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by being incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value (value 0) toward the initial value determined based on the random number determination for big hit determination. Count up. Every time the jackpot judgment random number is updated for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot judgment random number is determined based on the jackpot judgment initial value determination random number, and the start value determined Repeat the update one after another. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The jackpot determination initial value determination random number is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the same method as the above-described update method of the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the jackpot judging random number is counted up, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judging random number is determined, as described above, for determining the initial value for the jackpot judgment. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and updating is repeated sequentially from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. If the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, is processed as a numerical value and the sum is calculated Value) does not match the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the main control side power-off process (when power is off), etc. When clearing the area, the big hit judgment random number takes out an ID code which is a different value for each main control MPU 4100a built in and set for each main control MPU 4100a, and for a big hit judgment based on this taken out ID code It is set as the start value of the random number, and the jackpot determination random number is updated from this start value. Therefore, an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, in the jackpot determination random number, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the jackpot determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a uses the ID code in the nonvolatile storage unit built in the main control MPU 4100a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even when using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed to clear the entire area of the main control internal RAM, as well as being stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a. It is analyzed by the second security measure that the start value of the big hit judgment random number always derives the same fixed value for every main control MPU 4100a based on the ID code and the two-step security measure is taken To prevent. The initial value of the jackpot determination random number may be extracted and set instead of the ID code by extracting the hardware random number described above. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, it becomes possible to set different start values of the jackpot determination random numbers each time even for the same game board, and it is possible to further enhance security.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile storage means incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and this taken out ID code is used as the initial value of the jackpot determination random number. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball acquires the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means contained in the main control MPU 4100a Even if it is possible to illegally obtain the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value, the ID code has a unique code for identifying the individual. Since it has been done, it will be completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means incorporated in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value is completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by decomposing and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko machines, and thus the predetermined obtained by decomposing and analyzing Even when aiming for a start winning game where a momentary stop is generated at intervals and the gaming ball is made to enter the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 at predetermined intervals, the big hit gaming state can not be generated.

9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When the initial value update type counter clears the whole area of the main control internal RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile storage means, and based on the taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value in the first cycle, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judgment random number, it draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number as a jackpot judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability variation judgment table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured to update a predetermined fixed numerical value range ranging from the value 0 to the value 32767 as the minimum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range from the middle value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 10 to the value 209 is set in the low probability and the value 10 to 339 is set in the high probability. That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that will be a big hit is 200, and in the high probability, the number of big hit random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent synchronization between the plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated, the number of other random number values to be acquired simultaneously is 200 except when acquisition times of random number values are different. For example, prime numbers are used. That is, in this embodiment, if the random number for big hit judgment is different from the acquisition time of the random value, it is possible to make the number of the random value for the big hit not be a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, the number (50) of big hit judgment random numbers for the number obtained by dividing the number (200) of the big hit symbols with low probability by 4.

  When considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum hit value and the maximum value of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is either low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the first value 10 in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely low in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The former range is the latter range compared to the range following the last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball starts up by irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method. If cheating is done as if entering the opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is any value within the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The probability of becoming is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is an intermediate value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value. When the value is set in the range close to the maximum value side, the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) In comparison with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely high in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) Comparing the range over to the range from the first value (the value 32668 for the low probability, the value 31768 for the high probability) to the maximum (the value 32767), the former range is more comparable to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit determination. It counts up and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , It will count up toward the maximum value from the value obtained by lottery.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is the median value (value 16384) from the minimum value to the maximum value to the maximum value side If the value is set in a range close to 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is low (low The period over which the probability is 32667 and the probability is 31767) is irregular and random. Thus, for example, the game ball is raised by irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 in some way. Even if cheating is done as if entering the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is either of the ranges of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) by the counter in the second cycle The required time is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (the first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1 and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from time T1 to the fourth cycle is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the initial value update type counter, the fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter is the minimum value (the first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) (periodicity The player is not aware of this by leaving the

9-3. Main control side power on process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power on process of FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs processing when the main control side power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S10, the main control program starts output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC. The comparator MIC which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when the power failure or momentary interruption does not occur, the logic becomes HI and the result is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC, while when the power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, with its logic being LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a. Be done. Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure notice voltage and become stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. In the determination of step S14, it is determined whether the power failure advance signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC, as a power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilized after power on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input to Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip flop MIC to the latch state. The D-type flip flop MIC outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when the logic is latched to the PR terminal which is its preset terminal and the state where the logic is input to LOW is latched.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time of power on (when the game side power is on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 4100a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not to be instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 952 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. State (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer process 2 (step S22). In this weight timer process 2, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting for boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time (boot timer) until boot.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0, the power recovery information is read out from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where power has been turned on after the power has been shut off, as well as the state where power has been restored since a power failure or a momentary power failure, and detection of high frequency irradiation being detected. Also includes the state of recovery after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs power-on command generation processing (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) at step S24, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S28. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) at step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the main control program The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 instructs the RAM clear when deleting the game information, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the sum values do not match, or when the main control power is turned off. If not terminated normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, the big hit judgment random number is updated from the fixed numerical range of the counter. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the jackpot determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the above-described jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power on command divided into the power on shown in FIG. 15 for clearing the main control built-in RAM and reporting that initialization has been performed is created and peripheral The test commands classified into the test relation shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Following step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the main control program causes an error cancel navigation command to be issued after the operation switch 952 (operation switch) is operated. It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient). As described above, according to the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the error cancellation navi command for a predetermined time from the time of power on as described above, for the detection signal input following the operation of the operation switch 952. The RAM clear process is executed triggered by the input (game control side power on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error cancellation unit), which was originally used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization of the RAM, or after the lapse of the predetermined time It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S48 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S50). In the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for determining a big hit symbol initial value, the random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number regardless of the collision judgment (big hit judgment) is updated. In addition, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, etc. described above are also updated by this non-coincidence random number updating process.

  After step S50, the process returns to step S46, and the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether or not there is an input of a power failure notification signal. If there is no signal input, the non-coincidence random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The process of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is the start opening solenoid 2105, the attachment solenoid 2108A, 2108B, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the lower special symbol memory display 1187, the drive signal outputted to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state indicator 1183, the round indicator 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as described above.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs this main control side power-on process again. The process of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interrupt process.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). Clearing this interrupt flag allows the occurrence of another interrupt. Further, the clearing of the interrupt flag may be performed after all the processing in the timer interrupt processing is completed. In this way, management of interrupt processing is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts from occurring due to the occurrence of other interrupts during timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program enters, for example, the special winning opening 2103 and the respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting gaming balls having entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, for example. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls, a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls having entered the upper starting opening 2101, a lower for detecting gaming balls having entered the lower starting opening 2102 A detection signal from the start opening switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball to be described later From the payout control board 4110 that indicates that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the winning ball command transmitted in the control process Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. In addition, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball which entered the upper starting opening 2101 and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 which detects the game ball which entered the lower starting opening 2102 are read respectively. In addition, the start-up winning command divided into the other parts shown in FIG. 15 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, A starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the upper starting opening 2101, detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls entering the upper starting opening 2101, detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls entering the lower starting opening 2102 The detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed , Read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. Those that do not achieve the same result are treated as having no game ball entry.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program first detects detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. False detection due to the influence of chattering or noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings by two readings which are compared over the 3rd time and 2 times reading which is compared over the 2nd time and the 4th time Can increase the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. be able to.

  Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process, the ordinary symbol to be described later The payout control board 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in addition to the time for the normal symbol display 1189 to light in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the payer ACK signal for notifying that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S78). In this success random number update process, the above-described random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit symbol, and the random number for small hit symbol are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter is only executed each time this hit random number update processing is performed. Count up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value) The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this false random number updating process. The jackpot determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing. The normal symbol determination random number is the same as the above-described method for updating the jackpot determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 17 (main control shown in FIG. 17) random number determination for the big hit determination, random number for the big hit symbol, and random number for the small hit symbol initial value. The main process is updated in step S50 of the non-incidence random number update process in step S50 and in the main control side timer interrupt process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, but this routine is updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of times of execution of the non random random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time from the occurrence of unevenness in the processing time of the next to the generation of the next interrupt timer. Step S50: A random number for determining the initial value for the big hit, a random number for determining the initial value for the large hit symbol, and a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on the input information, or with the main control board 4100 A self check command is created to confirm the connection between the delivery control substrate 4110 and the substrate. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self check command as the main pay serial data to the payout control board 4110.

  Furthermore, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 upon receipt of the gaming ball in the big winning opening 2103, for example. In response to the detection information based on the detected signal being written in the corresponding defined bit area defined continuously by 1 bit over several minutes of the special winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as a prize ball A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that it should be dispensed, and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (disbursement control means).

  In the present embodiment, since two large winning openings 2103 are provided as the large winning openings, the main control program is configured of the plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From among them, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, they will be referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in order. In the case of a gaming board in which the number of large winning openings is one, for example, one definition bit area is used. The definition bit area used is, for example, 1 bit, and is an area adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area, which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes a definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing "0", and prepares for reception of the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which state of the defined bit area is to be confirmed. For example, assuming that the main control program defines the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 as the fourth bit, the main control program of the pachinko gaming machine in which only one special winning opening is provided as in this embodiment. In the case, the main control program acquires information of the fourth definition bit area.

  Furthermore, the main control program executes mask processing for the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with the prize ball effective range of the big winning opening 2103 described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not output to the dispensing control board 4110 should be avoided. If it is determined that this award ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program is forced to, for example, mask each defined bit area to which detection information based on the detection signal from count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”), and the award ball command may not be written to the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from count switch 2110 indicates that one game ball has been accepted in large winning opening 2103 in the main control program. In response to being written in the above definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above Write to At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 and transmits it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Output a sound that sounds like

  On the other hand, in the main control program, in the first special game state, detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the big winning opening 2103 is the big winning opening 2103 If the corresponding definition bit area is not written, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control means). The game ball payout operation is not performed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 so that payout of the game ball is permitted. Do.

  At this time, when the main control program pays out the game balls for the specified payout number or more which can be paid out in response to the reception of the game balls to the big winning opening 2103, the prize overrun abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 16) Is written to the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in a command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since the illegal game balls will not be paid out substantially, damage to the game arcade (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, when the acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 is detected instead, the main control program immediately writes a prize excessive abnormality command in the transmission information storage area, and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , May be notified to the speaker.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads out the award ball command from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (dispensing control means).

  As described above, when the game ball is received for the special winning opening 2103, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

  On the other hand, the main control program is configured such that the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 do not receive a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has completed reception of the winning ball command normally within a predetermined time. A self check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) divided into status displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the payee serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (a variety of commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified as status display in FIG. 16) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S84). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning opening 2103 by the count switch 2110 when not in the big hit gaming state, the main control program The prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special motorized product control process, the main control program determines whether the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. Then, if the probability change transition condition is established, then the state is shifted to the probability change state, and if the probability change transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to the game state other than the probability change state (win probability control) means). Here, the “probability fluctuation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state). Details of the special symbol and the special motorized role control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the start winning in accordance with the type of the special symbol, or the lower special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light 1186, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. Also, when the main control program, for example, to shift to the big hit gaming state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 shown in FIG. A close display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the sending information storage area as sending information, or an attacker solenoid 2108 A or The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Also, the main control program performs two rounds to light a two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two (round). Set the output of the lighting signal to the display lamp and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is six times, turn on the 6 round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190 The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on Set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp to be stored, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence or absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, triggered by the start winning of the game ball, the special symbol is then displayed in a variable display and a big hit lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is established together with a predetermined probability change When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the gaming state indicator is changed, and the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state. In the probability fluctuation state, the probability of the above-mentioned big hit lottery is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and a big hit is made. As described above, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability fluctuation state after the probability fluctuation state ends, the probability fluctuation state continues mainly until the next big hit if the big hit game is looped That behave like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machine"), and continue probability fluctuation state until the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the big hit game is over (hereinafter "ST (special time) machine ") Exists. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines of different types of continuation of the probability fluctuation state, the control of the above-mentioned gaming state indicator is different, and in the development stage, the control of the gaming state indicator must be designed one by one for each type. It was difficult to improve the development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is established thereafter, and the winning condition is established. In this case, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, and when the winning condition is satisfied and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state. While shifting to a probability fluctuation state set high, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 is turned on. After that, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the definite change transition condition is satisfied thereafter, the main control program causes the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 to be displayed in a specific interrupt cycle while the probability fluctuation state is continued. After the light-off state is temporarily switched off from the light-off state, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 changes from the light-off state to the light-off state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is established after the game ball is received by the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 as a trigger. (Lottery means), when the winning condition is established, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, while the winning condition is established and the probability change transition condition is established, the winning condition is established. The probability is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set relatively higher than the gaming state (gaming state control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 while the probability fluctuation state continues, while the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 when shifting to the gaming state other than the probability fluctuation state. Are turned off (lighting mode control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 triggered by the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above, and thereafter the win condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After changing the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 from the lighted state to the extinguished state temporarily in a certain interrupt cycle while the probability fluctuation state is continued, the game is played in the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the off state to the on state again (lighting state continuation control means). Although the player wants to make the player visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 can be changed as described above for a very short time. It can appear that the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 has not changed visually on the player.

  In this way, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the light has been turned off once on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 so that the light is visually recognized as if the light is being continued. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state continues continuously, the probability fluctuation state continues until the special symbol turns to the specified number of fluctuations after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again after the winning condition is satisfied within the prescribed fluctuation number, a program code for controlling the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 between different models. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of different types of pachinko gaming machines.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric combination control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning conditions are satisfied as described above, and further When the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is established, the state is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state, substantially without paying out the game balls substantially in the big hit gaming state. In addition, as a specific gaming state, a time saving operating condition as another example of the transition condition may be established and a time saving function may be in operation, or both of the games may be simultaneously performed together with the above-mentioned probability changing gaming state It may be in the state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the period from one gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state. By writing in the transmission information storage area as in, later in the same timer interrupt cycle, it is transmitted in the command transmission processing S92 described later (gaming state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability change transition condition is satisfied, the main control program changes the display of the special symbol until the game state changes to a game state other than the probability change game state, for example, the normal game state. Information regarding the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is transmitted by being included in any command transmitted upon the satisfaction of the start condition after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern By writing in the transmission information storage area as information, after that, in the same timer interrupt cycle, transmission is made in command transmission processing S92 described later (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the above-described remaining number information in other commands or may transmit the information to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, in general, a subroutine which is a program module configured by a set of program code is generally called after the CALL instruction included in the main routine is called and the program code group included in this program module is executed, Is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, it seems that it is difficult to reduce the program capacity at first glance, because an instruction for calling back is required.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes successive subroutines, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, instead of calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction in succession. Alternatively, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine as it is. With a program module of such a configuration, the overall capacity of the program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs the normal symbol and normal motorized product control process (step S88). The details of the normal symbol and the normal electric role control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the normal symbol and normal electric combination product control processing, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and processing at gate passing is performed based on the input information. In the gate passing process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information Remember to

  Further, following the gate passing process, the main control program reads out the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number per standard symbol judgment from the read gate information, and incorporates the main control built-in It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as a "normal lottery"). The main control program determines whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by normal lottery). When the main control program causes the opening and closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is in the open state, and the gaming state becomes acceptable to the lower starting opening 2102 and the gaming state is advantageous for the player Migrate to

  Furthermore, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above determination based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and divides it into the general drawing synchronization effect related shown in FIG. Commands are generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the normal symbol display 1189 is lighted in accordance with the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is An output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  In addition, the main control program, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, it relates to the regular electric work effect shown in FIG. The various commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106, and the output information described above as output information Store in storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random symbol determination random number per symbol that has been taken out does not match the standard symbol per time determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined on the basis of the above, and various commands to be classified into general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 15 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display 1189 in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs an ACK signal to the payout control substrate 4110 when various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. And a drive signal to attack solenoids 2108A and 2108B that perform opening and closing operations of the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when in the big hit gaming state, and a starting opening solenoid performing opening and closing operations of the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting the drive signal to 2105, 2 round big hit information output signal, 6 round big hit information output signal, 12 round big hit information output signal, 16 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as a command or data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as the main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 (command Transmission means). In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 15 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related Commands, various commands classified into big hit related (for example, when the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected, the winning opening 1 count corresponding to the big winning opening counting command based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general drawing tuning effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric wave director related, various types classified as notification display shown in FIG. 16 Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  The command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 uses a method in which a command previously stored for the ring buffer is output first as a buffer for command transmission. The main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the buffer for command transmission. For example, in the same timer interrupt processing, the special symbol and the special electric symbol control process (step S86) are executed and then the normal symbol and the ordinary electric symbol control process (step S88) are executed. By storing the command in the buffer for command transmission prior to the general drawing related prefetch command, the special drawing related prefetch command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 prior to the general drawing related prefetch command. Ru.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) Sends a frame state 1 command (second error generation command) to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a frame state 1 command of the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navi command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 is sent. Error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as an error release navi command of the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a main body frame open command having a form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a main body frame closing command having a form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame open command (first door frame open command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( The door frame open command (second door frame open command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means, second specific frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having a form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) Section) sends a door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having a form shown in FIG.

  Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, whereby the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general purpose register on the stack in a hardware manner and saves it. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the main control side main processing. At step S96, the contents stored in the stack and read out are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

9-5. Special symbol and special electric role control processing]
Next, the special symbol and the special motorized symbol control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process in this embodiment. The special symbol and special motorized product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric bonus game control processing, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit judgment random number by +1 each by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, ie, In response to the start winning (starting condition satisfied), the value of the counter mentioned above is taken out for each starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied, and it is set as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as a "special lottery". The main control program determines whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state based on the lottery result, and the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (predetermined winning condition is satisfied) The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state corresponds to the special gaming state, the first special gaming state, and the second special gaming state, and indicates the gaming state which collectively refers to these.

  In addition, when determining the big hit game mode, the main control program is, for example, data for defining the mode of the big hit game set in the big hit game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening for each round, One of main control built-in RAM specified by the address which made the closing time of the big winning a prize opening every round, and the definition data (the table) which shows the winning a prize count count of game ball offset according to the number of the big winning a prize opening It is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process will be described according to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special motorized role control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the lower large winning opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). If the gaming ball has won in the lower large winning opening (the result at step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the lower large winning opening has been won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the upper large winning opening (large winning opening 2) (step S104). If the game ball has won in the upper large winning opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a large winning opening winning combination designation command indicating that the upper large winning opening has won is set (step S106). Note that whether or not the game ball has entered the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 2110. Furthermore, when each prize designation command is set, it is not limited to detection only by the count switch, and when the corresponding special prize port is opened and is detected by the count switch, each prize designation command May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be the game state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol and special electric combination function operation number is a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be as well.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the upper gate (combination operation gate) (step S112). If the game ball passes the upper gate (the result at step S112 is "yes"), a combination operation gate passage command indicating that the game ball has passed the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won in the start winning opening (upper start opening 2101, lower start opening 2102). First, the starting opening 1 identification value is set in the starting opening identification area indicating the starting opening that is the target of winning determination (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101 (step S114). Whether or not the game ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, the presence or absence of the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Based on the input information.

  When the gaming ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a starting opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up winning process, a start-up winning command to be transmitted when the game ball newly wins the start-up is set, or a jackpot determination random number is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol The processing etc. for performing pre-reading effect are performed. The details of the starting opening winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the starting opening 2 identification value in the starting opening identification area (step S118), and determines whether the gaming ball has won in the lower starting opening 2102 (step S120). If the game ball has won in the lower starting opening 2102 (the result of step S 120 is “yes”), the starting opening winning process is executed as in the case of the upper starting opening 2101 (step S 122). The starting opening 1 identification value and the starting opening 2 identification value are processed at the starting opening winning so that it is possible to execute the processing at the starting opening winning which is common to the upper starting opening winning and the lower starting opening winning. Information for identifying whether the process being executed is due to the winning process with the upper starting opening or the lower winning opening based on each identification value in the inside, and is referred to in the starting opening winning process or It is a value set to enable identification of an area for storing a data table to be set and winning information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes the corresponding processing based on the special symbol / electric combination product operation number which is the gaming progress state variable in which the type of the branching process executed according to the progression of the game is designated (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the shifted branch process is finished, the special symbol and the special electric bonus game control End the process. In addition, since the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area is the game information, it is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In step S130 processing, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), special Symbol out-of-pattern stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), interval processing before big winning opening opening (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step S144) ), A special winning opening open end interval process (step S146), a winning combination actuation gate valid waiting processing (step S148) or a winning combination actuation gate valid processing (step S150).

  In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), variation of the special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 based on the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 Perform processing such as starting display.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling the variation display of the special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102, whether the special symbol started to change and decided to generate a big hit gaming state based on the ball entering the ball Make a decision on

  In the special symbol out-of-time stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the variation display of the special symbol in the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 is stopped and processing etc. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), when generating the big hit game state, the fluctuation indication of the special symbol in the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 is stopped and processing etc. Do.

  In the big winning a prize opening opening interval processing (step S140), the big hit game state is made to occur, processing etc are done for informing that the big hit operation is started.

  In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), the opening and closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, thereby performing processing relating to the big hit operation that makes the game ball easily enter the big winning opening 2103.

  In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), the opening and closing member 2006 is changed from the opened state to the closed state, thereby performing processing and the like regarding the big hit operation that makes the game ball difficult to enter the big winning opening 2103.

  In the winning opening open end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

  In the combination operation gate activation waiting process (step S148) or the combination operation gate activation process (step S150), the upper gate (combination operation gate) is activated or the passage of the upper game ball is detected. .

9-6. Processing when starting opening winning combination]
Next, the processing for winning opening winning will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting opening winning process according to the present embodiment. The starting opening winning process is executed in the processing of step S116 (upper starting opening 2101) and S122 (lower starting opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric combination control process shown in FIG.

  In the start-up winning process, the start-up winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created with the acceptance of the game ball in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 as a trigger. At this time, the starting opening winning combination command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting opening winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  The main control program first sets, as command data, start-up-opening winning command creation data for generating a start-up winning combination command (step S200), and executes command buffer setting processing (step S202). As a result, a command for starting opening winning is created and stored in the command buffer. The command at the time of starting opening winning of this embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning opening.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets the starting opening winning control data table corresponding to the starting opening that has won, based on the starting opening 1 identification value or starting opening 2 identification value selected before the starting opening winning process start. (Step S204). In the starting opening winning combination control data table, data necessary for processing executed at the starting winning combination is stored. Hereinafter, the control data table at the time of starting opening winning will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a control data table at the time of starting opening winning in the present embodiment. The start-up winning combination control data table defines a starting-opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 is won, and a starting opening winning control data table 2 that is set when the lower start opening 2102 is winning . In each table, a special symbol holding ball number command address table, a special symbol operation holding ball number area, a holding history special figure identification value, and a holding information storage area reference offset value are defined, and have the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the top of the start opening winning control data table corresponding to the start winning opening winning a prize. The address is set as the control data address. As a result, since the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the head address of the set control data table for starting opening winning, data corresponding to the starting opening is processed in common processing between the upper starting opening and the lower starting opening. You can get Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of holding balls stored in the area indicated by the operation holding ball number address set in the starting opening winning combination control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation pending ball number address corresponds to the operation pending ball number address (special symbol operation pending ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation pending ball number address is acquired as the holding ball number.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of holding balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). When the number of holding balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (result of step S208 is "yes"), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of balls held is less than the upper limit (the result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program adds 1 to the number of balls held (step S210). Furthermore, the special symbol total operation pending number (the content of the special symbol total operation pending number area), which is the sum of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, is incremented by 1 (step S212).

  Furthermore, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol suspension storage area) of various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by the start winning. Here, the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a view showing an example of the special symbol hold storage area (source code) related to the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. In addition, about the line described as "special symbol 1" on the right side of each line of FIG. 23, it is a special symbol hold storage area related to the upper starting opening 2101, and about the line described as "special symbol 2" Is a special symbol hold storage area related to the lower starting opening 2102. Further, in the case of “special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the number of reservations. In each area, one corresponding random number value is stored.

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value corresponding to the number of holding balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of holding balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)), a holding storage area index value (offset value for reference to holding information storage area) Add). The reserve storage area index value is “00H” if the value of the starting opening identification area is the starting opening 1 identification value, and if it is the starting opening 2 identification value, it is an offset value to be the special symbol 2 big hit judgment random number storage area _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the jackpot determination random number. In this way, by using the index value, it is possible to designate an appropriate storage location by common processing even if the start port is different. In addition, it is also possible to store data in different storage areas by making the index value different according to the timing of executing common processing. For example, when the big hit determination is performed at the time of the prefetch processing and the change start time, it becomes possible to store information required for the big hit determination in separate storage areas by setting different index values.

  Here, returning to the explanation of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the jackpot determination random number in the special symbol hold storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the jackpot determination random number area (counter value of the jackpot determination random number) is stored in the special symbol storage area corresponding to the number of holding balls. In addition to the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, reach judgment random number, variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation type random number), special symbol random number A random number for determining the final drop determination or the variation pattern is extracted at the starting opening winning combination and stored in the corresponding storage area. For example, when the special symbol 1 holding ball number is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is the top address, the big hit determination random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach determination random number is T_RIT_M1, the change pattern random number 1 is In T_HP1_M1, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP2_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program, based on the special symbol total operation pending number, the special figure identification value for selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation in the new pending storage, the corresponding pending identification history area (special symbol pending identification Area) (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of 1 byte each from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and based on the special symbol hold identification area 1, the special symbol total operation hold number 1 An address shifted by the subtracted value becomes an area corresponding to new pending storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning combination control data table set in the process of step S204. The special symbol holding identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper starting opening (special symbol 1) or the lower starting opening (special symbol 2), and at the start of fluctuation, the value of the head area of the special symbol holding identification area By determining, it is determined whether it is possible to start the variation of the special symbol.

  Finally, the main control program executes storage prefetching processing for executing special view prefetching rendition (step S218). The special figure preview effect is an effect that infers the lottery result of the special lottery in advance before starting the variable display of the special symbol. In the memory pre-reading process, various random numbers are acquired before starting variable display of the special symbol, and information for determining the special symbol pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value (fall information, symbol type, fluctuation A pattern number etc.) is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At this time, the main control program may include, in the command, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information indicating the type of the big hit game instead of the lottery result of the special lottery itself. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Details of the storage pre-reading process will be described later with reference to FIG.

9-7. Memory prefetching process]
Next, the details of the memory pre-reading process (step S218) in the process of starting opening winning will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of storage pre-reading processing in the present embodiment. In the memory pre-reading process, a process for executing pre-reading for acquiring the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol hold number specification command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory pre-reading process, the result is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute the suggested special view look-ahead effect.

  When the storage pre-reading process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (control data table for start winning) (step S240). Furthermore, a hold command without pre-read is set as a hold command (step S 242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern changes at the timing of the start winning and the timing when fluctuation is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different at the start winning and at the start of fluctuation, and the prefetching is prohibited when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different. For example, when the number of times the game is kept short (number of games) or the number of times the variation table is maintained (number of games) is the upper limit of the number of reservations (for example, one special symbol, the upper limit of the number of reservations is four) If the special symbol is 4 times, and the combined value of the upper limit number of each hold number is 8 for 4 times, even if the special symbol is 2 for 8 times, the variation display is started with priority given to one of the symbols In the case where the priority is within the upper limit of the number of holdings on the priority side, etc.), prefetching is prohibited. When the table for selecting a variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing of step S282 and subsequent steps without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is "no"), the main control program determines whether or not it is the prefetching determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the pre-reading determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not it is the pre-reading determination prohibition period is determined based on the advance notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, the notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning start hole (setting value of the start hole identification area) is set, and the notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol / electric combination product operation number and the time saving flag To get If the acquired advance notice permission determination data is "00H" (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if it is "01H" (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. The advance notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 shows an example of a table related to notice permission determination data, wherein (A) shows a notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of notice permission determination data. In the notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. Further, as the notice permission judging data, data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) are defined.

  The basic structure of the advance notice permission data address table is as follows: the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is the reference source information (the lower address of the reference target RAM area), and the third and fourth bytes are prefetched It is the reference table address of the prohibition period judgment. The data of the basic unit is set as many times as the reference is made with the data of the second to fourth bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, naturally, the data is not limited to two times, and may be one time or three or more times. With such a data structure, it is possible to cope with any specification by correcting only the data value without correcting the program code.

  For example, when the special symbol / motor combination item operation number is in the special symbol variation (HEND), the advance notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENOCK_OK), and the pre-reading is permitted. The special symbol / motor operated item operation number is numerical data, and for example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is moving is 1 and other values such as 0 for waiting for a special symbol (IDOL). Further, if the game ball has won the upper starting opening 2101 and the short time status (time short flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as the reference table for the read ahead prohibition period determination, and the time short flag The value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG ("01H" = corresponding to the pre-reading determination prohibition period) which is data of the second line of the notice permission determination data 2 is selected, and pre-reading is performed in the determination processing of step S246. It is regulated. The notice permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the read ahead prohibition period corresponding to the special figure 2, and the selection of data is the same as the notice permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so the detailed description is omitted. Do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate determination tables, but a common table may be used if the contents are the same, or each special symbol The content may be completely different.

  The description now returns to the flowchart of the storage pre-reading process of FIG. In the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is "yes"), the main control program does not perform pre-reading determination, and executes the processing of step S282 and subsequent steps.

  On the other hand, the main control program, when it is not the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the special design reservation storage area (store random number for every reservation number) Special symbol hold storage buffer (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to a special symbol hold storage area corresponding to one hold (random number value stored in the generic name of the area to Store the symbol random number buffer generically (step S248). Then, based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer, the pre-reading determination and the determination at the start of the change are performed. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area stored corresponding to the number of holds are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information at the head area of the special symbol hold storage area is stored in the buffer. It becomes possible to make judgments with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the time of start of fluctuation, and in any case, it is possible to share and use the subsequent processing (processing such as the big hit judgment).

  For special symbol 1 and hourly symbol 2, the special symbol reserve storage area is a random number storage N area for big hit determination, a random number storage N area for reach determination, a random number 1 storage N area for variation patterns, a random number 2 storage N area for variation patterns , A random type memory N area for variation type and a random number memory N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). The special symbol storage buffer includes a jackpot determination random number buffer, a reach determination random number buffer, a variation pattern random number 1 buffer, a variation pattern random number 2 buffer, a variation type random number buffer, and a special symbol random number buffer.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when the third symbol storage of special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 3 area is a jackpot determination random number buffer, Special symbol 1 Reach judgment random number storage 3 area value for reach judgment random number buffer, Special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage 3 area value fluctuation pattern random number 1 buffer, Special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage 3 Store the values of the area in the random pattern 2 buffer for variation pattern, the values of the random number storage 3 area for the special symbol 1 variation type in the random number buffer for variation type, the values in the special symbol 1 random symbol storage 3 area for the special symbol Do.

  Then, the main control program refers to each random number stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer set in the process of step S248, and executes the special symbol big hit determination process of determining the result of the special lottery (step S250) . The details of the special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process of determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S252). The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag etc. at the time of pre-reading determination. At the start of fluctuation, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  In addition to the special symbol selection flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), the big drawing symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), the variation pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), the variation type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), and the symbol type command buffer TZTP_CMBF), special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF) and special symbol operation pending ball number buffer (T_SID_CTBF) are included.

  In addition, as to the normal lottery, as in the case of the special lottery, a buffer relating to the prefetching of the normal lottery is provided. The buffer related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery includes a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF) and a normal symbol operation pending ball number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this manner, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to share the processing between the pre-reading time and the fluctuation start time.

  Further, the main control program sets a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and executes the variation type determination process of acquiring the variation type type value (step S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined in each variation pattern. One or more fluctuation types can be defined in one fluctuation pattern. The variation type corresponds to, for example, the type of pseudo continuous variation when the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation is selected. When the fluctuation type classification value is selected, the main control program sets the selected fluctuation type classification value in the fluctuation type classification buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the value from the jackpot determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent a malfunction by remaining a value when making a big hit determination.

  Further, the main control program sets a command (pattern type pre-reading command, variation pattern pre-reading command and variation type pre-reading command) indicating the pre-reading result in the command buffer for transmitting to peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278) . Further, the hold command reference value at the time of pre-reading is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

  Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (control data table at start winning) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set holding command reference value, the holding ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired holding ball number command (special symbol holding ball number specification command) is set in the command buffer ( Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the holding ball number command (special symbol holding ball number specification command) will be further described. In the address of the control data returned in the process of step S 282, the address of the starting opening winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (the value of the starting opening identifying area) where the gaming ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the starting opening winning combination control data table is common regardless of the value of the starting opening identification area, it is possible to commonize the subsequent processing.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to the special symbol holding ball number command, (A) is a special symbol holding ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol holding ball number specification command creation table . As shown in FIG. 22, the start opening winning combination control data table includes the address of the special symbol holding ball number command address table (the data set at the top address of each data table (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) The special symbol holding ball number command address table can be referred to from the address).

  The main control program is a special symbol 1 holding ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 corresponding to the winning start opening winning a prize or a special symbol 2 holding ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 Based on the hold command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol hold ball number specification command creation data is specified from the special symbol hold ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol holding ball number specification command creation data is a holding command generation table at the time of prefetch prohibition and (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), generation of hold command at the time of prefetching permission for each special symbol A table and (lower part, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol holding ball number specifying command based on the special symbol holding ball number specifying command making data. The data structure of the special symbol holding ball number specification command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3-byte data. The first byte is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the pending number, the second byte is the default value of the value set as the mode data of the command, and the third byte is the status data value of the command. Become. For example, when the special symbol 1 holding memory number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (in the case of 3 holding numbers), the special symbol holding ball number specification command in the case of prefetching is special symbol 1 holding ball number specification command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created on the basis of Specifically, the status value is "62H", the mode value is "02H" (number of reservations 3-1) + "11H" (default value) = "13H", and the special symbol holding ball number specification command is "6213H" It becomes. Finally, the created special symbol holding ball number specification command is set in the command buffer.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte data (default value of mode value) of the special symbol holding ball number specification command creation data is “01H” in the case of pre-reading prohibition, pre-reading permission In the case, it is "11H". Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number designation command are “0” in the case of prefetching prohibition and “1” in the case of prefetching permission even after adding the number of holdings. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol holding ball number specification command can determine presence or absence of pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number specification command. In this way, does peripheral control board 4140 wait until it receives information (command) necessary to execute the special view pre-reading effect by receiving the special symbol holding ball number specification command and referencing the mode value? It can be determined whether or not. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number designation command is "0", it is possible to continue the process without receiving the prefetch related command. In addition, the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol holding ball number specification command creation data is not limited to the description order, for example, the lower address of the storage area referring to the number of holdings is set in the second byte, etc. It may be set in a predetermined order. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and other information such as the pending number command output may be set as long as the data configuration is predetermined.

[9-8. Special symbol big hit judgment processing]
Subsequently, the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination processing determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning combination. The present process is commonly used at the time of pre-reading of the special lottery and at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (at the time of fluctuation display determination).

  The main control program first acquires a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, a special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value for performing a special lottery is acquired from the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit data (lower limit table for jackpot determination) based on the probability change flag (step S302). In the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit data (lower limit table for jackpot determination), a special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or high probability, and “00H” is set for low probability and “01H” for high probability. The special symbol jackpot determination lower limit data is set to a value according to the probability state, and the lower limit data is selected based on the probability change flag, and the lottery probability can be made different by making the lower limit data different. It has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). If the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is "no"), that is, if the big hit determination random number is greater than the big hit determination lower limit, the big hit determination random number is the big hit determination upper limit It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the big hit determination random number is generated is from 0 to the upper limit value, and the range of the random number determined to be the big hit is the range from the big hit determination lower limit value to the upper limit value. ing. Therefore, originally, if the jackpot judging random number is the jackpot judging lower limit value or more, it may be judged as a jackpot, but due to the influence of noise etc. a value exceeding the upper limit is set to the jackpot judging random number. There is also a possibility that it may be determined as a big hit if In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, the upper limit value is also compared.

  The main control program performs a big hit on the big hit flag if the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, if the big hit determination random number is less than the big hit determination upper limit. A winning is set (step S308). Specifically, a big hit is set as the flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. The big hit flag storage area is, as described above, a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of pre-reading determination.

  On the other hand, the main control program determines that the jackpot determination random number is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is "yes") or the jackpot determination random number is larger than the jackpot determination upper limit (step If the result of S306 is "yes"), the jackpot flag is set to no winning (unsent) (step S310). As a result, as in the case where it is determined to be smaller than the lower limit also when it is determined to be larger than the upper limit, a value that causes the big hit flag to be removed is set, and thus the value exceeding the upper limit is Even if set, it is prevented from being judged as a big hit by mistake. As described above, when the big hit flag is set, the special symbol big hit determination process is ended.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory pre-reading process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process specifies a special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted at the start winning combination.

  The main control program first acquires the big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big hit (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is set with a shifted symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the content of the big hit flag is big hit winning the result of the big hit flag (the result of step S322 is “yes”), the main control program from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number big hit symbol number and big hit symbol type The number is acquired (step S324). Since the jackpot symbols are defined in plurality, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol type number is a number corresponding to the type of the jackpot one to one. For example, 16R emerging with probability variation big hit (01H), 16R emerging with non probability variation big hit (02H), 16R without emergence segment positive variation big hit (no time reduction: latency probability change, 03H), 16R emergence non definite variation big hit (with time reduction: exact) , 04 H), small hit (05 H), etc. Also, the jackpot symbol number is a value provided in plurality for the symbol type number. For example, 01R to 10H for 16R emerging balls, 11H to 26H for 16R emerging balls, 16H emerging balls, 11H to 26H for 16R emerging balls, 27H to 3FH for no definite chances There are 40H to 55H for no hit, no definite variation big hit (with a short time: sudden), and 56H to 5FH for a small hit. In this manner, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers for the same jackpot type is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number This is to make it difficult for the special symbol (this special view) to be visually recognized from the player. On the other hand, since there is only one type of out pattern, it is not selected from the table, but a predetermined value (out pattern command value (0)) is set in the out pattern number.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol type number (step S326). Finally, the special symbol number value is set based on the jackpot symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is ended.

9-10. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the storage pre-reading process will be described. FIG.29 and FIG.30 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection determination processing in this embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. This process is also executed at the start of fluctuation as in the case of prefetching, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation.

  The main control program first acquires a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (Changing fluctuation selection information state table), a falling (Changing fluctuation selection information state table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 according to the gaming state. It is a data table in which table information for referring to reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value, and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variation information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block of the variation identification information source table according to special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) Step S344). Subsequently, the hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol selection flag buffer for pre-reading or the special symbol selection flag area for variation start (for example, 00H) : Remove, 01H: Big hit, 02H: Small hit) is acquired (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is won by determining whether the hit determination value matches the big hit value or the small hit value (step S350). If the big hit or the small hit is won (the result at step S 350 is “yes”), the big hit variation selection information type table is searched from the hit variation selection information status table based on the status flag (step S 352). At this time, the address of the retrieved big hit variation selection information type table is saved. The big hit variation selection information type table is a big hit variation type (a variation group of a stage before determining the big hit variation pattern, for example, a variation pattern finally determined such as SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, etc. It is a table for selecting groups (groups of groups). The selection of the variation pattern is determined based on the value set for the big hit symbol type when the result of the special lottery is won in the small hit and the big hit, and the big hit symbol type number is the big hit and small Since different values are set for hit and hit, it is possible to select a variation pattern by common processing for the big hit and the small hit.

  Next, the main control program acquires a big hit symbol type (a big hit symbol type buffer for pre-reading, or a value stored in a big hit symbol type area for fluctuation start time) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the variation information number search process of step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table according to the value of the variation pattern selection time variation special view identification area. (Step S356). The variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is used to determine the type for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table from the big hit variation selection information type table, based on the value of (per) symbol type Table.

  Next, the main control program executes the fluctuation information number search process using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby executing the fluctuation information number (from the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table to the hit fluctuation pattern selection value The type value for determining the data table is acquired (step S358). Furthermore, the jackpot variation selection information type table that has been saved is set as search data (step S360). Further, the variation information number, which is the result of the variation information number search process, is set as the selection value by the process of step S358 (step S362).

  On the other hand, when the main control program has not won the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the special symbol reach probability table is set as search data (step S364). And special symbol reach probability data corresponding to a state flag is searched from a special symbol reach probability table (Step S366). With the status flag, data digitized corresponding to the gaming status is set, and in the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-short (normal game) status) 01 H (high probability time short status) 02H Either (low probability time short state) or 03H (high probability non-time short state) is set. Thereby, it is possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the game state. Furthermore, reach determination for determining whether to generate reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of holding balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to the pre-reading or the change is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) A threshold is acquired (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach variation selection information state table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether reach is to be generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold acquired in the process of step S368. A reach is generated when the reach determination threshold is larger than the reach determination random number.

  If the main control program does not generate a reach in the variable display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control program sets a shift fluctuation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Further, the outlier selection information suspension table corresponding to the status flag is retrieved from the outlier variation selection information state table (step S376), and the retrieved outlier selection information suspension table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of holding balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to whether the pre-reading or the variation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set as the selection value (step 380).

  The processes of step S 374 to step S 380 are processes of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the case of the normal deviation where the reach does not occur. Usually, in the case of deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of reservations is large, the fluctuation pattern may have a shorter fluctuation time than in the case of small numbers. Is selected so as to be high.

  On the other hand, the main control program sets the state flag as the selection value (step 382) when the reach is generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is "yes"). When the reach is generated, the length of fluctuation time is not determined by the number of reservations, but the fluctuation time may be changed depending on the number of reservations as in the case of deviation. Specifically, even with the same reach fluctuation, when the number of reservations is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number is small. In this case, different fluctuation pattern commands are set because the fluctuation time is different.

  When the process of step S362, step S380 or step S382 ends, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), a big hit variation selection information type table is set as search data, and the variation is the search result of the variation information number search process of step S358 as a selection value. A pattern sorting design type value is set. If the result of the special lottery is out and reach occurs (step S 382), the reach variation selection information state table is set as the search data, and the state flag is set as the selection value. Furthermore, when the result of the special lottery is out and reach does not occur (step S380), the out-of-variation selection information suspension table is set as the search data, and the number of holding balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the variation pattern random number 1 (step S 386), and executes variation information number search processing (step S 388). The fluctuation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table by the fluctuation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires a fluctuation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selection data selection value from the fluctuation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and performs variation information number search processing based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table acquired by the processing of step S390. Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process is ended.

  The fluctuation pattern selection data table is configured of one or more sets of data, with the fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the fluctuation pattern set value as one set of data. By executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value set in the fluctuation pattern selection data table are compared, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 lower limit value is compared with the fluctuation pattern When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 is larger, the fluctuation pattern set value corresponding to the lower limit value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is selected. When the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. The variable pattern random number 2 is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers: variation pattern random number 1 (step S 386) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S 392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○ system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Furthermore, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed as a variation is selected. In addition, it is not limited to the method to draw in 2 steps, The system of drawing in 3 or more steps may be sufficient, and you may make it select a fluctuation pattern directly by the random number for one fluctuation pattern. In addition, since each of the current random numbers for variation patterns is configured by one byte, the determination by two random numbers is the same as the determination result by a total of two bytes of random numbers. In the case of selecting a variation pattern with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be configured by 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type determination process]
Subsequently, details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the storage pre-reading process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the fluctuation type determination process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the fluctuation type judgment data table for fluctuation type judgment data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and fluctuation information number search processing is executed (step S404).

  In the variation type determination data table, different variation type determination data is set according to the gaming state, and the variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the process of step S400. The variation type determination data is configured of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, the variation pattern selection value is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set in the variation type determination data by executing the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value. If it is determined, the variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the variation pattern selection value is smaller than the variation pattern lower limit value, change the variation pattern lower limit value until it is determined that the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value set next. While being executed repeatedly. In addition, before performing the fluctuation type determination process, the fluctuation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the fluctuation type is determined based on the fluctuation type determination data table set in the fluctuation information source address table. It is judged.

  Next, the main control program searches the fluctuation type determination data address table for (the address of) the fluctuation type selection data corresponding to the fluctuation type selection data selection value acquired by the fluctuation information number search process of step S404 (step S406). ).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a variation type random number as a comparison value (step S408), and executes variation information number search processing (step S410). At this time, the variation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the variation type setting value is acquired by the variation information number search process.

  The variation type selection data is configured of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type setting value as one set of data. By executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation type random number and the fluctuation type random number lower limit value set in the fluctuation type selection data are compared, and the fluctuation type random number is better than the fluctuation type random number lower limit. Is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the variation type random number lower limit value is selected. If the value of the fluctuation type random number is smaller than the fluctuation type random number lower limit, it is determined that the value of the fluctuation type random number is larger than the fluctuation type random lower limit set next. Is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number for variation type.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric symbol combination control processing will be described. FIG.32 and FIG.33 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process in this embodiment. In the special symbol variation waiting process, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The main control program first determines whether the variation display of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined from the value stored at the top of the special symbol hold identification area that the special symbol hold identification value (special symbol hold identification 1 area value) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next is not 0 or not. . The main control program does not start the variation display of the special symbol, when the loaded value is 0, that is, when the variation display of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S 420 is “no”), the main control program End the process.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing for starting the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, first, when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 (special symbol 2), the variable display is prioritized and executed, so the special symbol 2 is set to the starting opening identification value (step S422) ), Set special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data as fluctuation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set in the fluctuation setting data. Further, the special symbol 2 holding ball number is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the special symbol 2 holding ball number is not 0 (one or more) (step S428). When the special symbol 2 holding ball number is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set to the starting opening identification value (step S430), the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data as fluctuation setting data The setting is made (step S432).

  The variation setting data is configured by the RAM or data table address to be referred to for executing variation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and different values for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as a reference destination Are settable, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. Thereby, it is possible to execute the variation start process common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and specifically, it is as follows. The 1st byte is the lower byte of the operation pending ball number address, the 2nd and 3rd bytes are the pending ball number specification command creation data address, the 4th and 5th bytes are the transfer source address at the time of pending storage area transfer, and the 6th and 7th bytes are pending Storage area transfer destination address, 8th and 9th bytes are pending 4 storage area transfer source address, 10th and 11th bytes are pending 4 storage area transfer destination address, 12th and 13th bytes change setting data It is an address.

  After setting the variation setting data, the main control program stores the starting opening identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the variation of the special symbol, the number of actuation pending balls corresponding to the starting opening identification value and the special symbol total actuation pending number stored in the special symbol total actuation pending number area are decremented by 1 (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a pending ball number specification command as command data (step S438), and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the holding ball number specification command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt process. The command creation table (Figure 26 (A)) for creating the holding ball number specification command is the same as in prefetching, and uses the same table for prefetching and variation start to save program capacity. There is.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the jackpot determination random number acquired at the time of winning opening winning combination or the like. The details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area (FIG. 23) sequentially (step S446). In the special symbol holding storage area, holding storage (starting storage) including various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by starting winning is stored for the number of holdings for each starting opening winning. Clears the pending storage where the variation starts when the special symbol variation based on the pending storage is started, and shifts the remaining pending storage. For example, in the case where the number of reservations is at most 4, the reserve storage stored in the special symbol reserve storage 2 area is shifted to the special symbol reserve storage 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol reserve storage 3 area and the special symbol reserve storage 4 area The stored reserve storage is shifted to the special symbol reserve memory 2 area and the special symbol reserve memory 3 area. Thereafter, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The shift processing of the special symbol storage area stores the value set in the transfer source address during transfer storage area transfer, which is set in the fluctuation setting data, in the transfer destination address during transfer storage area transfer, and also during transfer The transfer source address and the pending storage area transfer time The forwarding address is updated to the next address, and the data stored in each pending storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the data setting address during fluctuation set in the fluctuation setting data as the setting data address, and information necessary for executing the special symbol fluctuation processing to be executed in the next interrupt processing A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure fluctuation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special pattern 2 variation pattern reference command is set, and if the special symbol 1 is the special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 variation pattern reference command is set (step S452- S456).

  Furthermore, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-level command data (step S458). Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is obtained by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the process of step S452 or step S456. The upper byte of is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and command storage processing is performed to store the created command data in a predetermined area (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if it is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. The setting is made (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a variation state designation command for transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). The generated commands are transmitted in the order of generation (the order stored in the command buffer). Therefore, when changing the transmission order, the order of generating the commands (order of storing in the command buffer) is changed. do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command prior to the variation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol holding history corresponding to the holding storage for which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol holding history (step S 478). In this embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol holding history of eight pieces (the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, each of four pieces) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the first holding storage is started And, the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol holding history stored in the second area (special symbol holding history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol holding history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, it is sufficient to shift the area storing the seven special symbol holding history. Finally, the final area (special symbol holding history identification 8 area) of the special symbol holding history identification area is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol variation waiting process is ended.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol / flag setting process in the present embodiment.

  The main control program first stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for making a big hit determination of the special lottery in the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, identify the special symbol to start variable display, the corresponding special symbol big hit determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2 The special symbol jackpot judgment random number stored in the jackpot judgment random number storage 1 area) is set. Then, the set special symbol jackpot determination random number is stored (transferred) in the jackpot determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, the special symbol hold storage area to be subjected to change start is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol hold storage buffer. Special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) Random number memory for big hit judgment 1 Other than special symbol big hit judgment random number stored in the area, special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) random number memory for reach judgment random number 1 area The random number buffer for reach judgment, the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2), the random number stored in the random number 1 storage 1 area for the variation pattern, for the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, for the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern The random number value stored in the random number 2 memory 1 area is used as a random number buffer for the variation pattern, and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) random number storage 1 area for the variation type as a random number buffer for variation type Random number value stored in the symbol 1 (special symbol 2) special symbol random number storage 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Furthermore, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, the special symbol big hit determination processing of determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and the address value of the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) is set to execute the special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination processing is executed at the time of prefetching (when it is executed in the processing of step S250 of the storage prefetch processing), as described above, the big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag (special symbol winning flag buffer) Is set. As described above, by setting the area of the RAM to be referred to / stored before the special symbol big hit determination processing in advance at the time of pre-reading and at the time of change, the "special symbol big hit determination process" at the time of pre-reading It is possible to share it with The procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process is as described in FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process of determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S 252 in the memory pre-reading process, and can be shared at the time of pre-reading and fluctuation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process. As you did. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches for a special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number setting value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes special symbol conversion processing for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (such as 7 segments) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as it is as display data of the special symbol display, it will become a fixed display pattern, and there is a possibility that the player may easily identify the kind of hit in the mode displayed on the special symbol display. Since there is a display pattern, the display pattern is acquired so as not to be a constant display pattern by calculation. In addition, it is possible to select the display pattern from the symbol number in the dedicated table so that the display pattern is not constant, but it is necessary to hold the display pattern by that amount when the type of the symbol type increases. The storage capacity for storing data is increased. Therefore, by acquiring the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

  Finally, the main control program adds an area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (1 added to the address of the searched special symbol stop area) to the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process. The special symbol / flag setting process is terminated (step S522).

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the present embodiment.

  The main control program first stores the number of special symbol operation pending balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation holding ball number area (special symbol 1 operation holding ball number area or the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol to start variable display Identify and set the value of the special symbol operation pending ball number area (special symbol operation pending ball number) to the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set storage value is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting the fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is the same as the process of step S258 in the memory pre-reading process, and can be shared at the time of pre-reading and at the time of variation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process. As you did. When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

  Next, the main control program searches data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step S546). The fluctuation time value acquired at this time is the reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes the fluctuation type determination process of acquiring the fluctuation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired fluctuation type type value in the fluctuation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is the same as the process of step S262 in the memory pre-reading process, and can be shared by the pre-reading time and the variation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, as described in FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of times of pseudo run. Then, the main control program adds the added value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546, and acquires the final fluctuation time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric combination product operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

[9-15. Regular symbol and ordinary electric role control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and the normal motorized symbol control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol and normal motorized prize control process in the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal motorized product control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric character combination control processing is started, the main control program first determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate unit (general drawing gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate section 2350, the presence or absence of the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Input information is written to the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the gaming ball.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is "yes"), the main control program executes gate pass processing (step S802). In the gate passing process, the value or the like of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normally is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The main control program, when the game ball has not passed through the gate portion 2350 (the result of step S800 is "no"), or, when the processing at the time of passing the gate is finished, the normal symbol · normal electric role combination A process corresponding to the normal symbol / electric combination product operation number is searched from the operation call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

  In step S810 processing, normal symbol variation waiting processing (step S812), normal symbol variation in progress processing (step S814), normal symbol jackpot determination processing (step S816), normal symbol off based on the normal symbol / electric combination product operation number The stop process (step S818), the normal symbol-performing stop process (step S820), the normal motor combination open / close process (step S822) or the power on operation end interval process (step S824) are executed.

  In the normal symbol variation waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate unit 2350, processing such as starting the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol changing process (step S 814), a process of controlling the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit determination processing (step S 816), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350, the determination of winning of the normal lottery or the like is performed.

  In the normal symbol out-of-time stop process (step S 818), when the normal lottery is not won, the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped and processing to notify that effect is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when winning the normal lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped to notify that effect, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric symbol) Processing such as setting the open / close mode of 2106 is performed.

  In the normal motor combination opening / closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (normal motor combination) 2106 are opened or closed so that the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102 and the lower starting is performed Processing such as processing for making the game ball unreceivable in the mouth 2102 is performed.

  In the routine operation end interval process (step S 824), it is determined whether the operation of the movable piece (normal motorized combination) 2106 is completed or not, and when it is completed, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[9-16. Processing at gate passing]
Subsequently, details of the gate passing process (step S802) in the normal symbol and normal electric role control process will be described. In the gate passing process, a command to be transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, or a random lottery for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a pre-reading effect is executed. Execute processing etc.

  In the gate passing process, as described above, the passage of the gaming ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, the value of the counter etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is extracted, and the gate of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with the zeroth to third partitions (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of the zeroth partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It has become. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. Hereinafter, the procedure of the gate passing process will be described along the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the gate passing process is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol operation pending ball number area as the operation pending ball number (step S 830). Then, it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls is 4 or more, which is the upper limit value (step S 832). If the number of operation pending balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of step S 832 is “yes”), the gate passing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the number of operation pending balls is less than the upper limit (the result of step S832 is "no"), the main control program stores the number of operation pending balls in the normal symbol operation pending ball number buffer (step S834). Furthermore, 1 is added to the contents of the normal symbol operation pending ball number area, and the normal symbol operation pending ball number is updated (step S 836).

  Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations (step S838). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol random number storage area is divided from the 0th section to the third section in a predetermined unit, and each section is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. For each gate passage, a random number for hit determination for determining the hit of the normal symbol and a hit symbol random number for determining the hit symbol for the normal symbol are stored in the normal symbol random number storage area. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number are each composed of 1 byte, so the predetermined unit is 2. In addition, the random number memorized as for normal symbols is not limited to the random number concerned, for example, when it comprises the random number for reach judgment for ordinary symbols like a special symbol or the random number for variation pattern, these are gated It can be configured to be stored for each passage.

  Finally, the main control program executes a normal symbol pre-reading process based on the newly stored normal symbol holding storage (step S840). Details of the normal symbol pre-reading process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal symbol pre-reading processing]
Subsequently, the details of the normal symbol pre-reading process (step S848) in the gate passing process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol pre-reading processing in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol pre-reading process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the normal symbol based on the newly stored common drawing reserve memory, and the common drawing pre-reading effect is peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value Information for determination (a normal symbol type pre-reading effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the normal symbol type pre-reading command is received, it is determined whether or not the common drawing pre-reading effect is executable, and the processing according to the determination result is performed.

  When the normal symbol pre-reading process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the pre-reading determination value to the pre-reading prohibition (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period is in effect at the time of process execution (step S852).

  Here, a period in which the pre-reading determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a period during which prefetching determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pre-read determination of the normal lottery is prohibited depending on the operation (open) state of the movable piece 2106 (normally driven combination).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation state of the normal motorized part is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect mode. In addition, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a variation time in the normal lottery, a winning probability, and a time saving state corresponding to the operation mode of the ordinary electric role. The probability states include a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probability state) in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery is higher than that of the low probability state. Further, in the time saving state, there are a non-time saving state and a time saving state which is more advantageous for the player than the non-time saving state. In the time saving state in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state, and the winning probability of the common drawing lottery is high. The time for the ball to enter the ball is configured to be long.

  In addition to the opening mode in the short time state, the opening mode of the ordinary motorized symbol according to the present embodiment is sufficiently short for the game ball to easily enter the lower start opening 2102, and the game ball is sufficient for the lower start opening 2102. There are two types of operation modes, long open that can enter the ball. Furthermore, the open mode of the short open and the long open may be different in the non-short time state and the short time state. The short opening in the short time state is an opening mode in which the ball can not easily enter the starting opening, but in the short time state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball can easily enter the starting opening as in the long opening. Further, the long opening may be an opening mode different in the non-time-short state and the time-short state, and may be an opening mode in which the ratio of winning to the starting opening is further increased in the time-short state compared to the non-time short state. Since it is difficult for the player to aim the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102 in the case of the short opening, the general view prefetching effect is executed only in the long opening.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect may be performed also in the case of the short opening. For example, by performing the same pre-reading effect in the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult to understand whether the player is in the long opening or the short opening, and the expectation due to the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. In addition, the player can identify which opening pattern is to be achieved by making the aspect of the pre-reading effect different or only a part of the short opening and the long opening, and performing the firing operation corresponding to the opening pattern. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, as for the pre-reading effect, a long or short may be provided with a garbled effect. In the case of the “Gaze effect”, although the pre-read effect is executed, the effect is ultimately not successful (fails), and as a result, the player is notified that the opening of the ordinary electric role is not performed. May be Although Gasse effect results in being disappointing for the player as a result, the opening operation is always performed when the pre-reading effect is performed if the Gase effect is not provided, so that the pre-reading effect is performed. The purpose is to further amplify the sense of expectation. In addition, a pre-reading effect may be provided as a fixed effect such that either short open or long open is necessarily performed in pre-reading effect. With regard to the determined effect, by setting the aspect different from the normal pre-read effect, it is possible to further amplify the sense of expectation for the player.

  It should be noted that in the case of a time saving state, the probability of winning the regular drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric role is long, the profit of notifying the long opening is poor for the player. You may not do.

  Furthermore, when the special view look-ahead effect is being executed, the execution of the common view look-ahead effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special view preview effect for changing the mode of the hold display is being executed, it is permitted to execute the regular view prefetch effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special view look-ahead effect for changing the background display is being executed, execution of the common view look-ahead effect is permitted if the probability state is a low probability, and if the probability state is a high probability, the general view look-ahead effect Regulate the implementation of This is because there is a possibility that the effect of the regular drawing look-ahead effect is reduced because the special view look-ahead effect in the high probability state has high expectation for the special lottery to be won. However, since the player can urge continuation of the firing without stopping the firing of the game ball while the special view prefetching effect is being executed, by performing the regular drawing prefetching effect, the common view prefetching effect is It may be performed. Further, the execution of the regular drawing prefetching effect may be regulated according to the gaming state, and for example, the execution of the regular drawing predictive effect may be regulated in the case of the big hit gaming state.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the pre-reading determination prohibition period has come (the result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing of step S868 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the pre-reading determination prohibition period is not reached (the result of step S852 is "no"), in order to execute pre-reading determination, the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be pre-read are hit and the determination random number buffer (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in any of the ordinary symbol random number storage areas of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of holding balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The normal symbol random number buffer is configured to correspond to the random value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, an area for two bytes of the random number for collision determination and the random number for hit is secured, and the random number buffer for collision determination and the random number buffer for symbol are used. Specifically, when the number of holding balls is two, the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively hit hit random number buffer and hit symbol random number buffer Stored. In this manner, the random number value relating to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, and the “normal symbol pattern determination process” is executed on the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit determination. It is possible to perform the determination and the collision determination at the start of the fluctuation in the same process.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the "normal symbol pattern determination process", the hit result, hit symbol, and the number of reservations are respectively hit flag buffer, normal symbol type area buffer Usually, it will be set / referred to in the symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Further, the main control program executes an ordinary symbol hit determination process of determining an ordinary symbol hit (step S858). The details of the normal symbol hitting determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the hit random number buffer is hit and the symbol random number buffer is cleared (step S860).

  When the main control program clears the hit random number buffer and clears the symbol random number buffer, it sets normal symbol type pre-reading command creation data as command data (step S862) and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type pre-reading command creation data The normal symbol pre-reading command (corresponding to the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the pre-reading determination value is reset to pre-reading permission (step S866).

  The main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation pending ball number command creation data 1 as command data after completion of the process of step S866 or in the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (result of step S852 is "yes"). (Step S868). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination value is pre-reading prohibition (step S870), and if the pre-reading determination value is not pre-reading prohibition (the result of step S870 is "no"), that is, the pre-reading determination value is pre-reading permission , The normal symbol operation pending ball number command creation data 2 is reset as command data (step S872). As described above, different commands are created for the normal symbol operation pending ball number command at the time of pre-reading permission and at the time of pre-reading prohibition, for example, different modes are set depending on the permission or prohibition of pre-reading. Finally, based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation pending ball number command at the time of prefetching permission or prefetching prohibition and sets it in the command buffer (step S874) ).

[9-18. Normal symbol hitting judgment processing]
Subsequently, details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol pre-reading process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hitting determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the normal symbol winning determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Furthermore, based on whether or not it is a time saving game state, the lower limit of the hit value etc. is selected from the determination lower limit value data table of the normal symbol, and the determination lower limit value data of the normal symbol is set (step S902). In addition, normal symbols have a high probability during time-shortening, and the number of hitting values during time-shortening is greater than the number of hitting values during non-time-shortening, so values such as the lower limit become smaller values during time-shortening (The total number of hits will increase). Further, the main control program temporarily sets no normal symbol winning as a default value to the normal symbol winning determination value (step S904).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether the comparison value set in the process of step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in the process of step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is "yes"), the regular drawing lottery determination value (normally set in the hit flag storage area is provisionally selected because the drawing of the flat map lottery was not won. The symbol is not won) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S 924). That is, at the time of disconnection, "0" (normal symbol winning not present), which is an offset value, is set in each of the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or more than the hit determination lower limit (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit (step S 908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S 908 is “yes”), it is judged as a difference as in the case of not winning the regular drawing lottery, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area Each of them is set to the outlier value "0". In the same manner as in the case of the special drawing, if the random number for collision judgment is originally equal to or more than the judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a collision, but due to the influence of noise etc. The upper limit value is also compared in order to cope with an erroneous operation in which an exceeded value is set.

  If the comparison value is less than or equal to the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S 908 is “no”), the main control program determines that it has won the regular drawing lottery, and selects the normal symbol winning (“normal symbol winning determination value” 1 ′ ′) is set (step S 910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets normal symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Further, a winning symbol random number is set as a comparison value (step S916), and variation information number search processing is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the hit symbol random number buffer by the fluctuation information number search processing to determine the hit symbol type, and the determined hit symbol type is stored in the hit symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, it is possible to share processing at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation by setting in advance different areas in the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storing area. Specifically, at the start of variation of the normal symbol, the hit flag storage area is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, a hit flag storage area is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to share processing between the pre-reading time and the fluctuation start time also for the ordinary drawing.

  In the above, the main processes concerning the special lottery and the ordinary lottery executed on the main control board 4100 have been described. The program for executing game control in the present embodiment is configured by a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the module configuration of the main control program in the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, a part of modules of the special symbol and special electric symbol combination control processing and the normal symbol and ordinary electric symbol combination control processing are extracted and shown.

  The control program in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is divided into modules for each function. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is a process for starting special prizes and special motorized prize control processes at starting opening prize winning Not only is it used in the special symbol variation waiting process, etc., it is also configured to be used in the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol look-ahead processing of the ordinary electric symbol control process. By configuring in this way, regardless of the type of command, it is possible to use a common module, buffer, etc. when creating a command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, a process (variation information number search process) for retrieving data (variation information number) from a predetermined table is also commonly available. This is realized by making the configuration of the table to be searched common and specifying the search range and the search parameter. By sharing and configuring modules in this manner, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  The command buffer setting process and the variation information number search process share modules with relatively few procedures, but in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the process such as the big hit determination of the special symbol is read ahead ( At the time of start winning) and at the start of fluctuation are common.

  Specifically, as described above, special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28) at the time of prefetching (storage prefetch processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation waiting processing), The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to the value stored at the designated address, and are stored in different areas at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation by designating the reference address before executing the process. It is possible to execute processing based on the value. Not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if the present invention is applied to processing of referring to a different table depending on the gaming state, common processing can be performed regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing related to the normal symbol, the normal symbol hit determination processing for determining the hit of the normal lottery is made common. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a hit flag indicating the result of the common drawing lottery is obtained from the hit flag storage area and processed. The address is set as the address, but when executed from the normal symbol variation waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as the reference address.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share the above-described relatively processing-intensive modules, and improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 44 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 45 is a flowchart, and FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 4150a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters the state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko game machine 1, etc. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, "0" in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 4150 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents are in agreement, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 4150 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150 db At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents are identical, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (see FIG. 12) ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c (see FIG. 13) and cleared to zero. Then, after performing the initialization setting processing, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 in response to the start of the supply of power by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means ). Specifically, first, in the control register 481 a of the touch panel controller 481, a contact determination threshold as an electrostatic capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state is stored. The touch panel controller 481 is triggered by the start of the supply of power by the power supply control unit, and is an initial value of the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a as a predetermined threshold for contact determination (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact Also referred to as “judgment threshold”.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is controlled to have the LED brightness included in the obtained brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranging from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 described above is It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for lamp driving boards is started, the game board 4 is stored in lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa of peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. 13. A state in which game board-side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai Transfer and write. Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, through the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caa is byte by byte. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When serial transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150 cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 5 is created by lamp data creation processing described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 4150 cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Information (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400) (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction)) ) Operation history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process to be described later is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display from channel CH1, 2 The data is output to the device 1900 and the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is used for the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropping of frames may occur, but a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output process of step S1012 and The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the effect shown in FIG. 2 by the effects by the plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 and sound data output processing described later It becomes a mechanism which can give priority to synchronization with the effect by the music, the sound effect, etc. according to various effects from the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. The audio data transmission IC 4160 c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a, and directs the right side audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system which makes it a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music and sound effects according to various effects from the speakers provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5 as well as the notification sound and the notification sound It is played back in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 13. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the reception command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, the start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of reserved normal symbols (0 to 4) Normal symbol memory command for identifying, symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command to be output when the number of start pending changes, degree of gaming ball accepted in big winning opening 2103 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output to the or frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence command) indicating the content of full shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether there is any (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently. Also, with this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command or the door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 15 are various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 synchronous effect related, various commands classified as big hit related, power ON The various commands to be displayed, the various commands to be classified into a common figure tuning effect related, the various commands to be classified into a regular electric connection effect related, the various commands shown to be informing display shown in FIG. , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands which are classified, various commands which are classified as test related, and various commands which are classified as others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In the warning processing, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 as described above, various kinds of abnormalities are made. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for executing the notification, are shown in the periphery of the peripheral control unit 4150 It extracts from various control data copy area 4150ce of control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c, and sets 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in the warning processing, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, various commands are classified into the state display shown in FIG. 16 that the presentation control program analyzes in the received command analysis processing (step S1022) For example, in the case of an error release navi command (second error release command), for example, the game board side liquid crystal display device by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal presentation mode 1900 (rendering device), upper dish liquid crystal display 244 (rendering device), lamp (rendering device) to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (rendering device) aurally external Alert to (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, cheating against the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs an RTC acquired information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquired information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs effect control processing (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs to execute a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when the demonstration screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not executed, or when a command for special figure tuning effect is received, the progress of special figure tuning effect is controlled. In addition, a big hit game effect and the like are executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special view look-ahead effect control processing (step S1027). In the special view preview effect control process, the effect control program performs setting at the start of execution of the special view preview effect. The details of the special view preview effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a common view prefetch effect control process (step S1028). In the common drawing pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs setting and progress control at the start of execution of the common drawing pre-reading effect. The details of the common view pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program causes the pointer to be updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the light emission indicated by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data Based on the data, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 4, the peripheral control unit 4150 It is extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa of peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs of various decoration boards provided The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. 13 is set.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, whereby the effect control program is data constituting the screen generation schedule data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and is arranged in time series. Among the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150 ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a. When the screen data is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a, this sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and also extracts the extracted at least one character data. Sprite data is created from the above, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, it is intended to be a mode in which the player's interest is hardly exhausted by displaying a video composed of a large number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame according to the progress of the game. Although it has been requested that display control be performed so as to include more material images in each frame in order to display more colorful images, including a large number of material images in each frame is apparently a display It seems that a heavy burden is placed on control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing processing load, the effect control program displays each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing correspondence relationship information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are previously defined, when trying to display a predetermined frame of each frame, the correspondence relationship information is referred to and the predetermined At least one predetermined material image to be represented included in the frame of the frame is specified, and the drawing data is included without including the other material image excluding the predetermined material image in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and including the predetermined material image The predetermined frame is generated based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer) and stored in the built-in VRAM. Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). The details will be described below.

  First, in the present embodiment, among a large number of background image data used to display a large number of background images constituting each frame, at least part of the background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) is At a position where the material image such as at least one sprite (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) should be originally arranged on the background image based on the specific background image data (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), It is managed as follows so that it may be represented by the display mode which can not be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as "hidden state").

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence relationship tying table (corresponding relationship information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, etc. are associated with this correspondence relationship. Refer to the table. In this correspondence relationship tying table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) Correspondence information defined in advance is managed together with a concealment cancellation command (secrecy cancellation instruction) for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence relation tying table, each sprite (and each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence information, coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame The value is managed.

  In this correspondence relation linking table, as such correspondence relation information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, The correspondence with the concealment cancellation command for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as a "desired sprite".

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program tries to display a predetermined frame according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed triggered by the establishment of the start condition, the correspondence relationship of the correspondence relationship tying table is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Information is referenced to specify a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and represented (source image identification means).

  Further, when the desired sprite is to be represented in the predetermined frame according to the schedule data, the effect control program specifies the concealment cancel command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence relationship information of the correspondence relationship tying table, The specified concealment cancellation command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a (consent cancellation instruction means). The concealment release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as a “desired sprite number”) which can identify a desired sprite to be released from the concealed state in the predetermined frame. By the output of such a concealment cancellation command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated to one that was initially off. The name tag information and the display state flag thereof are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source executes drawing processing.

  Here, when it is attempted to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) as follows. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode with the desired sprite which can be included in the predetermined frame based on the correspondence relationship information of the correspondence relationship tying table remains hidden. Generate drawing data for frame processing in the frame buffer. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite can not be visually recognized, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  On the other hand, when the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command, it receives that the concealment release command and the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in this is updated to on. As a trigger, the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation tying table is referred to and a desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data for releasing the concealed state of the specified desired sprite to provide a display mode capable of visually recognizing the desired sprite in the frame buffer. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame of a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this way, the effect control program does not have to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying a frame group of a certain scene due to the presence of the correspondence relation linking table. On the other hand, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source causes the VDP 4160a with a sound source to draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control as compared to the conventional display control whether to make the peripheral control MPU 4150a output a concealment cancel command or not Can draw a frame that does not represent a sprite. As a result, display control of a frame including a large number of sprites can be simplified to reduce the processing load.

  Moreover, since the correspondence relation linking table manages the correspondence by linking the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the secrecy cancellation command group issued by the group). The sprite data creation work and the presentation control program design work can be made independent and completely separated, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device which can be installed in a pachinko gaming machine, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is carried out as an initial process at the time of power-on, and then there are many devices which operate with the sensitivity. As described above, even if the adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed in the initial processing, it may be considered that the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate depending on the game environment after that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the display data creation process, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a so that the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) includes the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). Function to output the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) to execute the display operation of the aspect which urges the touch on the operation surface, and adjust the touch sensitivity of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for making (contact sensitivity adjustment means) effective is output (command output means). That is, the effect control program causes the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact type input means Command to execute the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and thereafter output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, (the display control program by the control of) the presentation control program controls the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact input means) with a finger based on the command. A screen of a mode prompting for touching is displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244.

  Next, subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel process, the effect control program mainly detects the touch state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the touch detection signal as a detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detection unit) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, and specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means) Operation information including this initial position is acquired. The effect control program may not only acquire such coordinate values but also acquire the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the touch range).

  In this touch panel process, as a countermeasure to the above-mentioned concern, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a separately from the effect command (effect execution command) described above, and thereafter in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written to the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (touch input control means) (sensitivity adjustment Command means).

  Specifically, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has passed from the main control MPU 4100a as the above-described predetermined timing, the effect control program executes a special figure 1 tuning effect end command (see FIG. 15). ) When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed since the last reception, or when the variation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command (figure The threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of (15).

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 receives a touch on the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the outside, as a touch on the touch panel 246. Adjust the touch sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a to receive the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and determines the contact determination stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command. The touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value. Specifically, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482 in response to the reception of the threshold setting command, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time a contact state is detected as described above, When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, and when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detected coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  In the above manner, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is set to a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the contact determination threshold to be determined is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. (Calibration). Therefore, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command by removing the output timing that may affect the game played by the player, thereby always affecting the game on the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be made an appropriate operation mode.

  As the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as described above, for example, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is output when variation display of the special symbol is finished. Alternatively, a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the special figure 2 tuning effect end command is received, and there is a low possibility that the player is in contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246 since the game is stopped. The timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the fluctuation display of the special symbol that may perform the presentation using the touch panel 246, and is performed in conjunction with the end of the fluctuation display. There is.

  In addition, as the timing to output the threshold setting command, a command at the time of the end of the common figure tuning effect (see FIG. 15) transmitted when the normal pattern variation time has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a as the effect control program It may be timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the reception.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the capacitance type and is provided on the upper tray 301 capable of storing a large number of gaming balls and easily generating static electricity, but it is also necessary after the power is turned on. Accordingly, the sensitivity adjustment is carried out at a predetermined timing, so it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound indicated by the pointer The command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, and controls the built-in sound source While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the data, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers provided is small, the loudness (in the present embodiment, the maximum) in the case where a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating The notification sound set to (volume) can be flowed. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a failure or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound and to add to music and sound effects to create a more powerful screen developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, which is advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents are respectively copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up respectively to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

  Specifically, in the backup process, backup is performed for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, that is, whenever the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which are included in the target Bank0 (1fr) The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (bank 2) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. 13 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr), Bank 0 (1 fr) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy of backup second area 4150cc to Bank 4 (1fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150 da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150 db as effect backup information (SRAM) as effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) The high speed copy is performed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 4150db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db sequentially by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates the copy of backup second area 4150 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM), Bank 0 (SRAM From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All data is copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac to Bank 4 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), each second predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in the second area 4150 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af and the peripheral control external WDT 4 150 e so that the peripheral control MPU 4 150 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the effect control program is executing peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1009, and 1 ms interrupt in step S1010. The timer activation process is performed, and each process of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed. Finally, in step S1038, the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as completion of peripheral control unit steady process execution. If set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 can be received is input from liquid crystal built-in VDP 4160a of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed triggered by the event will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 18 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. At the time of power-on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 42, the peripheral control unit in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal which is this routine indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value SP to 1 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in logic (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to notifying interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether there is any, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, the rendering control program is executed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, as shown in FIG. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is as it is Finish. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid driving processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a and the peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached shown in FIG. 13 are arranged in time series. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program displays the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid driving processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program performs serial I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a Of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, drive signals to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 4150 caf is sent via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf for 1 byte, external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 4150 cae of peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a is configured. Drive to a motor or solenoid for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board motor drive data SM-DAT that has been sent via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information , And movable position history information etc.) are set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input (for example, dial operation unit The rotation (rotational direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150 a are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is performed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area 4150 ca shown in FIG. 13 for the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. Transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time it is executed 4150 cah and effect information (1 ms) which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai are Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 4150 cb as effect backup information (1 ms) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 4150 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa performs peripheral control D The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150 ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb is specified, and Bank 0 (1 ms) from the contents stored at the top address of Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), and Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the start address of) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and copy of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42, various processing relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect is executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

10-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which one byte (8 bits) of information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port built in the control MPU 4150a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the environment of accepting files. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100? It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. 13; peripheral command MPU 4150a and receive command storage area 4150cac of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received in the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

10-5. Variation pattern]
Subsequently, the effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table for managing the pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure tuning effect executed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control substrate 4100. The special figure tuning effect includes effects such as the peripheral control board 4140 fluctuatingly displaying a decorative pattern on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or displaying a character corresponding to the variable display game. In addition, effects such as operating a movable character during variable display of a decorative symbol, emitting a light emitter such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker may be included. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous fluctuation (simulated series), and the like. Also, variation patterns may be defined across multiple variation display games.

  The story reach is an effect in which a decorative pattern is a reach mode, and a specific effect corresponding to the degree of expectation (probability of being a big hit) of the variable display game being executed is executed one or more times. In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is set to be higher as the number of times of execution of the specific effect is larger. The specific effect may be performed before the reach occurs, or may be performed only after the reach occurs. In addition, the effect mode of the specific effect includes, for example, screen display (cut-in) such as appearance of a character, serif (screen display, voice output), operation of movable role, type of light emission of lamp, etc. . Moreover, several different presentation modes according to an expectation may be defined by the same kind of presentation.

  The pseudo continuous fluctuation is an effect in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and re-varied. Temporary stopping and re-variation may be repeated one or more times. In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is set to be higher as the number of times of stoppage is larger. Further, in the case of executing the pseudo continuous variation, an effect such as causing a character to appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be performed, or an effect may be executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In addition, when reach occurs due to the final change of the pseudo continuous change, the type of reach in the final change may be defined together.

  The variation pattern is a combination of the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140). Values (effect pattern) and special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) It is selected based on the value (result of the fluctuation display game) or the like set in the mode of “special symbol pattern type command” in combination with the type command. In addition, one variation pattern may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, random values may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on predetermined conditions such as a gaming state.

  The fluctuation pattern table includes items such as fluctuation pattern name, winning information, fluctuation time, effect insertion number (number of scenarios), effect selection pattern, re-lottery, and the like. "Variation pattern name" is a name for identifying a variation pattern. The "falling information" is the result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to the value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. In addition, it is good also as game state (for example, "normal state" "certain change state" "time saving state") instead of "the hit information".

  The "variation time" corresponds to the variation time (execution time of the variation display game) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Also, the fluctuation time may be changed according to the number of starting memories. For example, when the number of starting memories is large (for example, the number of starting memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be shortened. In addition, it is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same is true even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

  The "number of effect insertions" is the number of times the specific effect is executed during the variable display in the story reach, or the number of times the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (regardless of the execution of the effect at the temporary stop). It is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a candidate for a specific effect to be executed in the story reach, or selecting an effect to be executed at the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. In the present embodiment, as the highly reliable variation pattern is selected, the effect selection pattern is set such that the highly specific identification effect is more likely to be selected. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The “relottery” is information defining whether or not to execute a process of redrawing a stopped special symbol after variation display of the special symbol is finished. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

10-6. Receive command analysis process]
Subsequently, the received command analysis process (the process of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the present embodiment.

  In the reception command analysis process, the effect control program is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) to first determine whether the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer It is determined (step S1401).

  When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, it generates peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 45). In this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, the main control board 4100 Are stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c provided on the peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order of reception.

  If a command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the effect control program receives the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring It reads from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the effect control program determines whether the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that it is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140, and The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the read out command is not the special view variation pattern command (the result at step S1403 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read out command is the special design type command (special figure 1 design type command or It is determined whether or not it is a winning type information command indicating FIG. 2 symbol type command, “outside”, “specified big hit” and “non-specified big hit” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). When it is determined that it is a special symbol pattern type command (the result of step S1405 is "Yes"), the win information is stored in the win information storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the reception command End analysis processing.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read rendering command is not the special symbol pattern type command (the result at step S1405 is "No"), the command by which the read command instructs special rendering prefetch effect (special symbol 1 hold) It is determined whether it is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 hold number designation command (pre-read available), FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure preview effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at a timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls (number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls) increases. As will be described later, when the read rendering command is a command for instructing a special drawing prefetching effect, a special drawing prefetching effect execution flag indicating execution of a special drawing prefetch effect is set. Therefore, the determination of “Yes” in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read rendering command is “pre-read” special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command. If it is a special symbol 1 (2) pending number specification command of "pre-read nothing", it is determined as "No". In addition, as a special figure pre-reading effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command instructing special figure pre-reading effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserve number designating command (pattern type pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading, fluctuation type pre-reading) In addition, it is possible to make the decision of "Yes", when the command which directs all these special figure pre-reading effects is received including.

  Furthermore, when the read out rendering command is a special view look-ahead effect command (result of step S1407 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special view look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408), and the received command analysis process Finish. When the special view preview effect execution flag is set, in the special view preview effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process, whether to execute the special view preview effect is determined, and the special view prefetch process is performed. Make the necessary settings to perform the presentation. Note that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special view prefetch effect.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not read the special command look-ahead effect command (the result at step S1408 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads a regular-pattern look-ahead effect command (normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not (step S1409). The regular drawing pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of normal symbol operation holding balls increases. In addition, the common drawing pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the common drawing lottery. When the common drawing pre-reading effect command is received, a common drawing pre-reading effect execution flag is set to instruct the start of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect (general drawing pre-reading effect). When the generic drawing prefetch effect execution flag is set, in the regular drawing prefetch effect control processing (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing, whether to execute the generic drawing prefetch effect is determined and the generic drawing prefetch Make the necessary settings to perform the presentation. Note that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the general drawing prefetch effect. Also, in the case of a model that does not execute a regular drawing look-ahead effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150a executes processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command, when the read rendering command is not a general drawing prefetch rendering command (result of step S1409 is "No") (step S1411), end the received command analysis process.

  In the command received from the main control board 4100, as described in FIGS. 15 and 16, for example, a special figure tuning effect end command (special figure 1 tuning effect end command for stopping the variation display of the special symbol or If the result of the special figure 2 tuning effect end command) and the variable display game is a big hit, the fluctuation state specification command which specifies the gaming state (certain change state, time saving state, normal gaming state) after the end of the big hit game is included. When the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the tuning effect end flag is set. Also, a big hit opening command instructing execution of effects at the start of the big hit game, a big hit ending command instructing execution of effects at the end of the big hit game, etc. are included according to the result of the variable display game.

  Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, a starting opening winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a starting opening winning combination effect notifying that the gaming ball has won in the starting opening. The start of (for example, voice output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls changes due to the game ball winning in the upper starting opening 2101 or the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol indicator 1185, the main symbol control special symbol 1 memory command It receives from the substrate 4100. Similarly, when the number of special symbol 2 activation balls is changed due to the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102 or the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 memory command is mainly used. It receives from the control board 4100.

  In addition, the special symbol 1 memory command (special symbol 2 memory command) includes the special symbol 1 operation suspension ball number (special symbol 2 operation suspension ball number), and the game board side liquid crystal display based on the processing of step S1107 The display corresponding to the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

  Also, when a notification command notifying an error occurrence other than the effect related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) Execute the process

  Furthermore, in addition to the commands described above, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is shut off, a power-off command is transmitted. It should be noted that power is supplied to main control board 4100 for a predetermined time from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on power supply board 851 even when power supply from outside such as a pachinko island facility is stopped. Information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held, and a command such as a power-off command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or the like. In addition, when the power supply from the outside is resumed, a power on command is transmitted. When receiving the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes processing according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

10-7. Effect control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 of FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is any of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and the big hit display process (step S1700) based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. Perform the process of

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is "0", the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the received command analysis process. The processing for starting the special figure tuning effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the falling information of the fluctuation display game, the effect contents (stop symbol of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, judgment of execution of notice effect, notice effect mode, presence of extension effect, etc.) are determined, Perform settings etc. according to the determined effect contents. In addition, control is performed to execute a demonstration effect when the special figure tuning effect is not performed. Details of the decorative symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is "1", the variation display game is performed on condition that the special figure tuning effect (variation display of the decoration symbol) is started. Control special feature tuning rendition to be performed synchronously. Further, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the special figure tuning effect is finished and processing for stopping the decision is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation processing, effect control is performed from when the special image tuning effect is started to when it is ended. Details of the decorative symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, at the time of reception of the special figure tuning effect end command, in order to end the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol, the effect control program causes the decorative symbol based on the result of the variation display game to be decidedly stopped. Finally, the effect control program sets a process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, the process selection flag is set to [2] when the result of the variable display game is "big hit", and the process selection flag is set to [0] when the result of the variable display game is "off". Set

  In order to continue the special figure tuning effect until the special figure tuning effect end condition is satisfied, for example, the effect control program changes the scene (image) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or the character Perform effects such as making them appear. In addition, the effect not depending on the fluctuation pattern may be independently executed. For example, the pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the fluctuation display game to be executed next time or the like is performed.

  In the big hit display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to the big hit time interval effect command set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48), or a big hit On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, display indicating that the special winning opening 2003 is opened on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display etc. Control each). In addition, at the end of the process, a flag corresponding to the interval presentation command at the time of big hit, and a flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decorative pattern change start process]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is "0" will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of decorative symbol variation start processing in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side, the process waits until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49). . Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control of the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  Specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result at step S1501 is "No"), is the effect control program being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 during the demonstration effect? It is determined whether or not it is (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is "No"), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the display effect such as the previous symbol variation is finished ( Step S1512). If the predetermined time has elapsed (the result at step S1512 is "Yes"), a demonstration effect display flag for starting demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set (step S1513).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result at step S1512 is "No"), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. If the result of step S1501 is "Yes" or if a predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is "Yes"), the process waits until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  Also, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed in the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 (result of step S1511 is "Yes"), the effect control program continues the execution of the demonstration effect as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is "Yes"), the effect control program clears the fluctuation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special symbol pattern type command, the effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the effect control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By performing control in this manner, the decorative symbol variation start process is performed only once at the start of the execution of the special figure tuning effect.

[10-9. Effect setting process]
Subsequently, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect content at the start of the special view tuning effect. Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, setting of corresponding flags and setting of parameters are performed. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first identifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, based on the current gaming state (for example, probability change state, time reduction state, probability change time short state, normal gaming state, etc., may be such an effect mode related to only the effect mode), fluctuation A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of the gaming state may be provided in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a different variation pattern of the effect mode may be defined for each gaming state.

  Then, the effect control program sets the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the identified fluctuation pattern is a story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result at step S1521 is "Yes"), a story reach setting process is performed to set data necessary for executing the story reach (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the specified variation pattern is not a story reach (the result at step S1521 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). If it is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1522 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process for setting data necessary for execution of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, if the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (the result at step S 1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary to execute the effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, a continuous pre-reading effect setting process for executing the continuous pre-reading effect capable of setting the effect contents independently of the fluctuation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous pre-reading effect setting process, when it is determined that the continuous pre-reading effect is executed in the special view pre-reading effect control process of step S1027 of FIG. 42, the progress of the continuous pre-reading effect is controlled based on the determined effect content Do. Details of the continuous pre-reading effect setting process will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the gaming state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the gaming board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the music and voice outputted from the speakers, etc. are set according to the gaming state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is finalized and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the gaming state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the gaming board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the music and voice outputted from the speakers, etc. are set according to the gaming state. In addition, the presentation pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to indicate the result of the variable display, a specific character is made to appear, or the background color is set to an unusual color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is finalized and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process ends, information necessary for executing the special view tuning effect is set. The lamp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the lamp data creation process (step S1028), the display data By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, special figure tuning effects such as variation display of a decorative symbol are started.

[10-10. Decorative pattern variation processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is "1" will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process according to the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol variation processing is executed when the decorative symbol variation start processing is executed and the processing selection flag is "1". Then, in the decorative symbol variation process, on the condition that the special figure tuning effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) is started, the special figure tuning effect executed in synchronization with the variation display game is controlled.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether the condition for ending the variation display of the decorative symbol, that is, whether the termination condition of the special figure tuning effect is satisfied (step S1601). As a termination condition of the special figure tuning effect, for example, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when the special figure tuning effect end command (design determination command) is received from the main control board 4100, or the special figure tuning effect The special figure tuning effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both reception of the special figure tuning effect end command and an elapsed time from the start of the special figure tuning effect may be used as the ending condition of the special figure tuning effect, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure tuning effect. Alternatively, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the variable display may be forcibly ended and the display screen may be switched so as to stop the decorative symbol.

  When the termination condition of the special figure tuning effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), the effect control program causes the variation display to be stopped (decided stop) with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol pattern type command Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to “0” when the result of the variable display game is “off”, and the process selection flag is set to “2” when the result is “big hit”. Also, if there is a "small hit", another processing selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

  On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the termination condition of the special figure tuning effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), that is, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is continued, first, the fluctuation pattern It is determined whether the type is story reach (step S1604). If the type of fluctuation pattern is story reach (the result at step S1604 is "Y"), a story reach control process is executed to control the progress of story reach (step S1610). In the present embodiment, all scenario effects to be executed in story reach are selected at the start of variable display (story reach setting process), but in the case where each scenario is selected immediately before the scenario effect execution, story reach control process Is selected. In addition, when the progression of scenario rendering is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation situation of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and control according to the operation situation is performed. Just do it.

  If the type of fluctuation pattern is not story reach (the result at step S1604 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether the type of fluctuation pattern is pseudo continuous fluctuation (step S1605). If the type of fluctuation pattern is pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1604 is "Yes"), pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing for controlling the progression of pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous variation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, the effect control program executes control processing of the special figure tuning effect corresponding to the change pattern such as the special reach when the type of change pattern is not a pseudo continuous change (result of step S1605 is "No") ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. In addition, the effect not depending on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently, and for example, a pre-reading effect may be executed that suggests the result of the fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later. When the control of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, the present process ends.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing that is executed when the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e of the main control substrate 4100 is input from the main control substrate 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt process.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the blackout notification signal Is determined (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the excitation of motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 is turned off, and the various LEDs are turned off. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of pachinko gaming machine 1 by this, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even if the power of pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer The received command is stored in.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) in the backup management target work area 4150 ca shown in FIG. 13 are stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) of the backup first area 4150 cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy the backup first area 4150cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) Content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The content stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored in the start address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the content stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac in the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa is included in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac by the PU core 4150aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All data are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Can not be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, while when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 42 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and released in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[11. Story reach]
Subsequently, the case where the story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 4140 executes special figure tuning effects in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, in the special figure tuning effect, an effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed one or more times (insertion) Be done.

  In addition, in the production which depends on the story reach, the decoration design becomes the reach aspect, but execution timing of the specific production may be before the reach production or after the reach production. In the present embodiment, the specific effect in the story reach is configured to be executed after the reach occurrence. Hereinafter, the effects when the story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[11. Story reach setting process]
First, presentation control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach setting process according to the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, the process relating to the setting of the specific effect performed at a predetermined timing will be described, and other fluctuation patterns are selected for the setting of special figure tuning effect such as other reach effects. Since the process is performed in the same manner as in the case where it has been performed, the description will be omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (probability state, normal state) or the operating state of the normal motorized symbol (time reduction state). Further, the number of selected effects indicating the number (counter) of specific effects set in the present process is set to an initial value (“0”) (step S1532). Subsequently, a scenario of a specific effect is selected for the number of effect insertions (steps S1533 to S1539). In this embodiment, the specific effects to be performed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effects to be performed first are selected last.

  The effect control program determines whether the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the effect insertion number, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all the specific effects (step S1533). If the number of selected effects is less than the number of inserted effects (the result at step S1533 is "No"), there is still a specific effect for which no scenario has been selected, so a process for selecting a scenario (steps S1534 to S1538) Run.

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure of selecting a specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the change pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, the specific effect of any one of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the expectation degree that the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( The possibility is set to be high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a scenario with a high degree of expectation is easily selected in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in the pattern 1, scenario 5 and scenario 6 with relatively high expectation are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenario 1 and scenario 2 with relatively low expectation are selected It is set not to be.

  Furthermore, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random value acquired in the process of step S1534 of FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random number.

  Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each gaming state. For example, in the high probability state in which the variable display of the special symbol has a high probability of winning, a scenario with a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the player's sense of expectation may be further enhanced. Furthermore, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected according to the establishment of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the gaming state described above, the number of times of execution of the variable display based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, the number of times of SP reach execution), or the big win in the big hit game It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination of these.

  The random number for selecting the specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, in the range of “0” to “1000”). Therefore, when a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected and then a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected (due to a drop), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, in the case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern, pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is three. At this time, it is assumed that a scenario corresponding to a specific effect to be executed first is “scenario 2”, a scenario to be executed next is “scenario 3”, and a scenario to be finally executed is “scenario 1”. In this case, the specific effect performed after the specific effect (“scenario 3”) performed for the second time becomes “scenario 1” with a relatively low degree of expectation. Therefore, the player can not judge whether the degree of expectation of the variable display game under execution corresponds to "scenario 1" or "scenario 3", and the reliability of the story reach as the advance notice effect is lost. There is a risk of

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S 1613, the occurrence of the above-mentioned fall is prevented. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the change of the random number extraction range in the present embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects to be performed last are sequentially selected. When “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (the number of insertion effects is 3), first, the specific effect to be executed last (third) is executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, random number values are extracted in the range of 0 to 1000 (prescribed range) (FIG. 55A). If the random number value extracted at this time is “550”, “scenario 3” is selected by referring to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. Then, the effect control program stores the identification information of the selected scenario in the predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150 c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S 1536). Note that information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b or the like. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value) of random numbers extracted to select a specific effect to be executed second (step S1538). As described above, since "scenario 3" is selected in the specific effect to be executed last, if "scenario 4" is selected in the specific effect to be executed second, a fall will occur . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the random number value generation range is selected so that only “scenario 1” to “scenario 3” are selected instead of the prescribed range of 0 to 1000. Is set in the range of 0 to 600. The upper limit value "600" reset is the upper limit value for which "scenario 3" is selected, and by setting the upper limit value to "600", "scenario 4" is not selected. In FIG. 55 (B), the range of solid lines ("0" to "600") is the extractable range of random numbers, and the range of broken lines (range from "600" to "1000") is the extraction of random numbers. It is a possible range.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random number value for selecting a specific effect to be executed second, “scenario 2” is selected as a scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit value of the range of extracted random number values to "200" so that "scenario 1" or "scenario 2" which does not occur due to the specific effect to be executed first is selected. Set After that, for example, when “85” is extracted as a random number value, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55 (C)).

  Then, the value of the selected effect number becomes 3 in the process of step S1538, and the value of the selected effect number matches the value of the effect inserted number, so the result of the process of step S1533 becomes "Yes", and the effect control program Finish the selection of the effect. Finally, the range (upper limit value) of the changed random number is set to a prescribed value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is ended.

  In the procedure in the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers is set at the time of start of fluctuation (effect control process → decoration symbol fluctuation start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at other timings A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, at the timing when the specific effect is executed first (when the specific effect is started), all the specific effect scenarios may be selected. In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing when the first specific effect is performed.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on the start winning command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the command related to the pre-reading effect, etc. before the specific effect is executed from the start of the change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to make various variations of the effect. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the reach occurrence, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  In addition, at the timing of selecting a specific effect, random numbers having a number corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted, rearranged in ascending order, and the execution order of the specific effect may be determined. For example, when the random number value is extracted three times and “550”, “85”, “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), “550” (scenario) Specific effects may be performed in the order of 3).

  Furthermore, a random number lottery may be performed each time the specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of the specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and the random value for selecting the scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit value of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, effects are set to be executed with a higher degree of expectation as the random number value increases, so when selecting specific effects to be performed in order of execution, the upper limit value is selected. Instead, reset the lower limit value. Specifically, when scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit value is set to "100" so that no fall occurs when selecting the next specific effect, and a random value within the range of "100" to "1000" To generate By performing control in this manner, it is possible to execute story reach as in the case of selecting a specific effect at the start of fluctuation or the like. When the selection of the specific effect is finished, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c is held, and used to execute the next specific effect. Furthermore, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variation display game (special figure tuning effect) is finished. A more specific procedure will be described in the control of pseudo continuous effect described later.

  Furthermore, both of the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be settable at the time of selection of the specific effect. By doing this, it is possible to control to make it easier to execute the scenarios in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, it is possible to select only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”. Also, by setting the lower limit value to "101" and the upper limit value to "200", it is also possible to make sure that "scenario 2" is selected. In addition, it can process similarly about the case where all the specific presentation is selected at the time of a fluctuation | variation start etc. FIG. Furthermore, items such as setting only the upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be provided in the effect selection pattern table, and may be set for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit is not “0”, random numbers from “0” to “lower limit−upper limit” may be generated, and the lower limit may be added to the extracted random number. For example, when the lower limit is "101" and the upper limit is "200", random numbers from "0" to "99 (= lower limit-upper limit)" are generated and the lower limit "101" is added. The result may be a random number extracted.

11-2. Example of production]
By the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect to be executed in the story reach so that a fall will not occur. Subsequently, a specific example of the effect when the story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect performed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, after reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is shrunk to move to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start memory display unit 1911. An area 1912 displays a dialogue corresponding to the specific presentation scenario to be executed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario (serif) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5 and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, it indicates that the expectation of the variable display game being executed is high in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6. Specifically, in the scenario 1, a message (“Damish !!”) indicating that the degree of expectation is low is displayed, and the words are set so that the sense of expectation is sequentially increased. In scenario 5, a dialogue that suggests a big hit ("perhaps?") Is set, and in scenario 6, a dialogue ("big hit ~ !!") that indicates that the big hit has been decided is set. The scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit is determined.

  Subsequently, the screen transition of the story reach will be described. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the screen transition of the story reach in the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 58A, the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, since the story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, as shown in the screen (B), the reach occurs at a predetermined timing.

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect is performed in which the dialogue (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), the scenario 3 having a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the random number generation range is not adjusted, in the specific effect to be executed last, as shown in the screen (E-1), the specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the specific effect performed before is It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed to prevent a fall, a specific effect having the same or a high degree of expectation as the specific effect performed before is necessarily performed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, since the scenario is selected in order from the specific effect to be executed last, when the scenario 1 is selected last, the scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same expectation may be prepared, and the same specific effect may not be continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern, temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed one or more times in the special figure tuning effect, and selection is made by lottery at predetermined timing. The presentation based on the selected scenario is performed. In the effect based on the scenario, an effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed is executed as in the above-described story mode.

  Although the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is recognized from the player as if the variation of the decorative symbol has stopped, it is in a state where the fluctuation is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol to be finally stopped is in a state of being slightly moved up and down, and re-variation is started from this state.

  In addition, regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The variation display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be re-varied. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and only the difference in the fourth symbol may be used as a different result mode. By configuring in this way, part of the big hit result aspect and the small hit result aspect are made similar to each other and the hit game is executed, and the game state after the end of the hit game (e.g., the probability of winning the variable display game) Can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and variations in effects can be increased.

  In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the change are determined, but in the pseudo continuous change in the present embodiment, the scenario is randomly selected and selected at the timing of executing the specific effect (scenario effect). . Further, in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, even if reach occurs in the final re-change, even if normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be performed even if pseudo continuous fluctuation does not occur is performed. It may be a reach effect that is executed only in the case of pseudo continuous variation. Also, in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is not necessary to generate reach at the final fluctuation. Hereinafter, the effects when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

12-1. Pseudo continuous variation setting process]
First, effect control in pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation, as described above, the content of the effect is drawn just before executing the specific effect (scenario effect). Therefore, at the start of fluctuation, initialization necessary to execute pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo continuous variation setting process shown in FIG. 60, a process relating to setting of a specific effect to be executed at a predetermined timing will be described, and other variation patterns for setting of special figure tuning effects such as other reach effects are available. Since the process is performed in the same manner as the selected case, the description is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the number of effect insertions (number of temporary stops) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551). Store in a predetermined area.

  Furthermore, the effect control program sets the effect insertion number as an initial value to the remaining effect number that is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, in order to initialize the range (upper limit value and lower limit value) of the random number for selecting the scenario of the specific effect, a specified value is set (step S 1553). In the present embodiment, the contents of presentation are randomly selected at the time of scenario presentation execution, and since the scenario presentation performed first is sequentially selected, the lower limit is initialized as the range of scenario selection random numbers. At this time, in order to limit the selected scenario, an upper limit may be set.

  As in the case of the story mode, all the scenarios may be drawn in the pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of the variation. The procedure for drawing scenario effects is the same as in the story mode.

12-2. Pseudo continuous variation control processing]
Subsequently, pseudo continuous variation control processing executed in the decorative symbol variation processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous variation control process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed between the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and the stop thereof, and controls the execution of the temporary stop and the scenario presentation in the pseudo continuous variation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo continuous variation production of this embodiment, when the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is set according to the timing of the temporary stop, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input acceptance period, Scenario rendering is performed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, normal presentation is continued without executing scenario presentation.

  The effect control program first determines whether a pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted in order to execute the scenario effect. That is, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, processing for executing a scenario effect is performed.

  When the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. (Step S1646). If it is not time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S1646 is "No"), the pseudo continuous variation control process is ended.

  If it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S 1646 is “Yes”), it suggests that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (press operation The setting for executing the effect (requesting operation of the part 405) is performed (step S1647). Further, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1648), and the pseudo continuous variation control process is ended. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the timing of temporary stopping of the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (the result at step S1631 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired by the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is a process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (FIG. 42). Is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady process in.

  If the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (the result at step S1632 is "Yes"), the effect control program acquires random number values in the range of the set upper limit value and lower limit value (step S1633). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the presentation pattern table is the same as that of the story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario with a low degree of expectation is easily selected.

  The presentation control program executes scenario execution setting processing for setting presentation information related to image data, sound data, etc. necessary to execute presentation (specific presentation) based on the selected scenario when a scenario is selected. (Step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is a lamp after the lamp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady process are performed. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  After that, the effect control program lowers the lower limit value of the range of random number values for selecting the scenario to be executed next so that the falling of the effect contents does not occur based on the random number values acquired in the process of step S1633. The setting is made (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower degree of expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, at least a similar scenario is selected. For example, the case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the acquired random number value is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to "301", a scenario with an expectation equal to or higher than scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. In addition, by setting the lower limit value to "501" instead of "301", it can be set so as to always rise.

  On the other hand, when the pressing control unit operation flag is not set (the result at step S1632 is "No"), the effect control program causes the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measuring timer to time out. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1638). If the time is not up (the result at step S1638 is "No"), the pseudo continuous effect control process is ended, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measuring timer has timed out (the result at step S1638 is "Yes"), the processing at step S1640 and subsequent steps is executed.

  When the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, or when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is not accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, the time is up. The effect control program ends the pressing operation unit operation suggestive effect (step S1640). Further, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is cleared (step S1641), and the number of remaining effects is decremented by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the effect control program determines whether the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). If the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is "Yes"), the last specific effect is executed, so the upper limit of the random number is set to the specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. End the process.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result at step S1643 is "No"), the effect control program measures the pressing operation portion operation acceptable time to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation portion. The timer is set (step S1644).

  From the above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measuring timer is not up and the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, the specific effect is obtained. It is controlled to be executed. Note that the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be after the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped, or may be immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measuring timer is up, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The group operation flag may be cleared.

12-3. Example of production of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Subsequently, an example of the effect of pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed in accordance with the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol before the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the operation acceptance to the pressing operation unit 405 becomes possible), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is at the timing of temporary stop. The process ends (the operation acceptance to the pressing operation unit 405 becomes impossible). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation accepting to the pressing operation unit 405 is possible (pressing operation unit operation acceptable period), after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the re-variation of the identification symbol is started The specific effect is executed during the

  The specific effect is similar to the story reach, and when the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is shrunk and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start memory display portion 1911. An area 1912 displays a dialogue corresponding to the specific presentation scenario to be executed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variation indication of the decorative symbol is started, and in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, as shown in FIG. The decoration pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a pressing operation unit operation acceptable period starts, and a pressing operation unit suggestion effect for prompting operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, as shown in FIG. 63C, the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is to be executed is stopped as a middle symbol, and then the diagram As shown in 63 (D), a specific effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the pressing operation part suggestion effect is started as in FIG. 63 (B) (FIG. 63 (F)). At this time, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, after temporary stop of the decorative symbol (FIG. 63 (G)), re-variation is started without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63 (H)). Thereafter, when the final stop of the decorative symbol is performed (FIG. 63 (I)), reach effect is executed (FIG. 63 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed is executed even when the pseudo continuous variation is not executed, but the reach executed at this time is an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous effect Good. Also, the pressing operation part indication effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, re-variation is started without executing the specific effect, but after the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific effect is It may be performed.

12-4. Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are diagrams for explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 64A shows the case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  First, at time t10, the game balls are won in starting openings 2101 and 2102, and the variation display of the special symbol on main control board 4100 (the special symbol (identification symbol) on upper special symbol indicator 1185 or lower special symbol indicator 1186 Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, the special control pattern variation command and the special symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a fluctuation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of special figure tuning effect), a period before accepting temporary stop of the decorative symbol A possible period) is started, and a pressing operation part suggestion effect is started (time t11). The pressing operation portion operation acceptable period continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, the scenario effect to be executed is lottery (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period (time t12), the drawing is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decoration symbol ends (timing to start re-variation of the decoration symbol, time t14) Execute a specific effect based on the selected scenario.

  Similarly, specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t15 at scenario 3 and time t16. Thereafter, when the final temporary stop is finished, reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the reach effect is finished, the variation of the decorative symbol is finished in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the final symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Subsequently, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. FIG. 64B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 in the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect based on scenario 1 is not executed. In addition, since the lower limit of a random number is not reset, the specific effect performed at the timing of time t15 can select all the scenarios used as a candidate.

  Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modification of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C shows the case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect is performed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to perform the effect without a sense of discomfort.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, skipping is performed without executing the specific effect, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during a pressing operation unit operation acceptable period generated thereafter. To perform the specific effect of the skipped amount.

  Referring to FIG. 65D, the case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 in the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. It shows. In this case, the specific effect to be executed at the second temporary stop is skipped, but at the third temporary stop, the specific effect to be skipped is also executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect to be performed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, the specific effect including the skipped portion is selected. After temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the selected specific effects (scenario 3, scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous rendition in the present embodiment, the execution is performed by setting the range (lower limit value) of the random numbers for drawing the subsequent specific effects based on the random numbers for drawing the specific effects to precede. It is possible to prevent a drop in the production of an expectation lower than the expectation of the specific performance to be performed.

  Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's intention.

12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous variation]
[12-5-1. Modified example of scenario selection timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous variation described above, the pressing operation section operable period is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and a scenario for executing a specific effect at the timing when the pressing operation section 405 is operated is selected. Was. On the other hand, as in the case of the story reach described above, a case will be described in which all scenarios for executing a specific effect are selected at the start of fluctuation.

  When all scenarios are selected at the start of fluctuation, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), steps S1533 to S53 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) The same process as S1538 is performed. By configuring in this manner, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in a state in which all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect are set.

  As described above, when all the scenarios are determined at the start of the fluctuation, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated in the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect not executed is restricted (skip) You may In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, the re-lottery may be executed to select the scenario again. In addition, without executing the re-lottery, it is possible to skip without executing the specific effect which is restricted, to execute the specific effect which has been set beforehand, or to specify based on the scenario skipped by releasing the restriction. A presentation may be performed.

  In addition, when the last specific effect is executed, even when the specific effect to be executed in the middle is restricted, at the time of the change start to inform the player of the final expected degree A specific effect based on the determined scenario may be performed.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[12-5-2. Modified example of specific effect execution condition]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405, but the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions are, for example, a symbol that is decided to stop, and a symbol of a combination that does not appear at the time of a loss, when stopping at a so-called chance eye, a specific effect is executed without operating the pressing operation unit 405 (In this case, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 may not be required). In addition, the specific effect may be performed when the decorative symbol is stopped by a combination including a symbol associated with a special symbol that appears only at the temporary stop of the symbol instead of the chance symbol. In this case, not only the final stop symbol must be a pseudo ream symbol but any one of the symbol rows to be displayed may be stopped at the pseudo relic symbol. Moreover, you may perform specific presentation, when it stops by the symbol (what is called so-called missing eye) at the time of a normal losing.

  Also, the timing of the specific effect execution is when a predetermined movable body (movable role) operates, a predetermined light emitter (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, and a predetermined sound is output. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right. For example, the specific effect may be performed when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing. Further, the mode of the effect may be changed according to the rotation direction of the dial.

  As another operation means, for example, a lever type operation unit such as a control stick may be disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect may be performed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

  Furthermore, a touch panel may be mounted on the surface of the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 470, allowing the player to perform an operation input from the touch panel, and performing a specific effect by operating the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 470. Good. Further, in the touch panel, in order to enable various inputs, not only the selection of the specific effect but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed according to the operation content.

  Not only the above-described contact-type operation means but also non-contact-type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be disposed on the front side of the gaming machine, and the player may perform a specific effect by performing an operation such as holding a hand in front of the gaming board.

[13. Special figure pre-reading effect]
Then, before the change display of a special symbol is started, the pre-reading effect which suggests the result of a change display is explained. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is the starting pre-reading effect which is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and the starting memory which is the target of the pre-reading effect at a predetermined timing. The continuous look-ahead effect in which the expectation degree of the variable display based on is suggested is comprised so that execution is possible.

  The normal pre-reading effect displays, for example, the pending display of the starting memory of the pre-reading object in a mode different from the normal. Further, in the continuous pre-reading effect, the mode of the pending display of the starting memory to be pre-read is changed each time the starting memory that is variably displayed in advance is digested. The specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be executed at the timing of changing the mode of the suspension display, in addition to changing the mode of the suspension display of the start memory.

13-1. Special view preview effect control process]
First, the special-figure previewing effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the special-figure previewing effect control process in this embodiment. In the special view preview effect control process, a process for executing a normal preview effect and a process for determining whether to execute a continuous advance effect are executed. The special view prefetch effect control process may be executed when the prefetch effect command is received in the reception command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether the pre-read effect execution flag is set (step S2001). The prefetch presentation effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the prefetch presentation effect command is received from the main control board 4100 as described above (step S1408 in FIG. 48). When the pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), since pre-reading effect is not executed, the special figure pre-reading effect control processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the normal pre-reading effect is based on the contents of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the start storage of the pre-reading object. Mode is selected (step S2002). At this time, the aspect of the normal pre-reading effect may be changed only when the reach effect is performed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory of the pre-reading object.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a normal pre-reading effect lottery table in the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when the game ball wins in the starting opening, the mode of the holding display is performed regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed except when the number of holding starting memories is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

  The hold display is "white" when the pre-reading effect is not executed, but when the pre-reading effect is usually executed, the display color of the hold display is predetermined according to the expectation from "white" to the big hit It changes to "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" by the probability of (Fig. 67). Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the hold display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of the out-of-page.

  When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal pre-reading effect setting process for setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal pre-reading effect setting process, setting is made to change the display color of the hold display, and setting is made to output a sound effect at the change timing, turn on a lamp, or move a character. Thereafter, the pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). This makes it possible to prevent a plurality of normal look-ahead effects from being executed for one start-up memory.

  In the present embodiment, continuous pre-reading effect is configured to be performed only when normal pre-reading effect is performed. That is, the player comes to have a sense of expectation by the pre-reading effect at the timing when the game ball is won in the starting opening, and when the mode of the hold display is further changed by the progress of the game, the player comes to have a greater expectation. It should be noted that the continuous pre-reading effect may be executed without executing the normal pre-reading effect, for example, if there are a large number of starting storages being held, the continuous pre-reading effect is executed without executing the normal pre-reading effect You may do so. In particular, it is effective when the upper starting opening and the lower starting opening can always be paid, and these starting openings can be alternately winning enabled so that up to eight starting memories can be reserved.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the pre-read effect is normally executed (step S2005). If the normal pre-reading effect is not performed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, if the color of the hold display does not change with “white”, the special-picture pre-reading is performed without executing the continuous pre-reading effect. The effect control process ends.

  When executing the normal pre-reading effect (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program is based on various information included in the pre-reading effect command received from the main control board 4100, the continuous pre-reading effect lottery table ( The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 67) (step S2006), and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute continuous pre-reading effect (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, fluctuation patterns and crash information. In addition, the starting memory number (special symbol operation pending ball number) is included in the special symbol memory command transmitted at the same timing as the pre-reading effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous pre-reading effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special view pre-reading effect control process is ended.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous pre-reading effect lottery table in the present embodiment. The continuous pre-reading effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of starting memories is three or more because the mode of the hold display changes over a plurality of changes. Also, when the result of the variable display based on the starting memory is a big hit (or a high probability of big hit), continuous pre-reading effect is easily performed, and the number of continuous pre-readings is set to be easy to increase. .

  In addition, a lottery (step S2007) as to whether or not to execute continuous pre-reading effect is drawn based on the continuous pre-reading effect execution probability. Moreover, when reach does not generate | occur | produce in starting memory | storage of pre-reading object, it is set so that continuous pre-reading effect may not be performed.

  The effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous pre-reading effect lottery table, when executing the continuous pre-reading effect (the result of step S2007 is “Yes”) (step S2008). Further, the number of times of continuous pre-reading effect execution is set to the number of remaining effects (the number of remaining pre-readings) (step S2009).

  Further, the effect control program sets the range (upper limit value and lower limit value) of the random numbers for selecting the continuous pre-reading effect to the specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special view pre-reading effect control process is ended.

13-2. Continuous pre-reading effect setting processing]
Then, the continuous pre-reading effect setting processing performed in decoration design variation processing is explained. The continuous pre-reading effect setting process is a process of controlling the pre-reading effect for the start memory which is the target of the pre-reading effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the pending display of the start memory for the pre-reading effect is changed at the timing when the start memory is executed prior to the start memory for the pre-reading effect object. Execute the process

  FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the continuous pre-reading effect setting process of this embodiment. The continuous pre-reading effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special drawing pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 66) when performing the continuous pre-reading effect. If the continuous pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous pre-reading effect process is ended because the continuous pre-reading effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value for selecting the pre-reading effect (specific effect) to be executed ( Step S2102). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, the aspect of the specific effect is acquired from the continuous pre-reading effect mode selection table (FIG. 70) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, the setting for performing continuous pre-reading effect (specific effect) is performed.

  The continuous pre-reading effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment changes the shape of the pending display according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous pre-reading effect is executed in the state where the normal pre-reading effect is executed, it is controlled so that the shape changes in the state where the color of the suspension display changes. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous pre-reading effect mode selection table for selecting the mode of the hold display in the continuous pre-reading effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the present embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined in accordance with the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, if the effect selection pattern is “pattern 2”, if the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect 1; if it is 201 to 400, the specific effect 2. The special effect 6 is selected.

  Further, in pattern 1, the specific effect 5 and the specific effect 6 having high expectation are not selected, and in the pattern 1, all specific effects are executable, but the specification having high expectation A range of random numbers is set so that it is difficult to select an effect. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 having a low degree of expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 or the specific effect 5 having a high degree of expectation is easily selected. As shown in FIG. 68, pattern 1 is selected with a fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  In addition, when the same shape as the continuous pre-reading effect performed previously is selected, the game may be advanced as it is as the continuous pre-reading effect is not performed, or the on-hold display blinks temporarily. Alternatively, the player may be notified that continuous pre-reading effect has been executed.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts one from the remaining effect number (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all continuous pre-reading effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). If the number of remaining effects has become 0 (the result of step S2106 is "Yes"), since all the continuous pre-reading effects have been executed, the continuous pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a prescribed value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous pre-reading effect setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the remaining effect number is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is "No"), that is, when the continuous pre-reading effect is not all executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102 The lower limit value of the random number is set based on (step S2109). For example, when the random selection value extracted in the “pattern 3” is “350”, the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, the falling edge The lower limit value of the random number is set to the lower limit value "201" when the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the lower order value does not occur. Thereby, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, random number values in the range of "201" to "1000" are extracted in the process of step S2102, and it is more than the effect previously executed in the continuous look-ahead effect It is possible to prevent the effect with a low degree of expectation from being performed.

  Note that the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the pending display changes in stages in the continuous pre-reading effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of times of continuous pre-reading execution is “3”, the lower limit value is “0” and the upper limit value is “4” so that the specific effect to be executed first becomes 1 to 4. It will be 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect to be executed for the second time is set to "201" and the upper limit value to "800". That is, the specific effect is set such that one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing this, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation is always high (as it rises), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is performed in the next (last) specific effect As a result, it is possible to select a specific effect to prevent a fall and to ensure that the degree of expectation is high. Note that since it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation if it is set so as to surely rise, it may be controlled so as to surely rise only in the case of a big hit.

13-3. Example of production]
By the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect so as not to cause a fall in continuous pre-reading effect. Then, the specific example of continuous pre-reading effect is demonstrated. FIG. 71 is a view showing an example of screen transition of continuous pre-reading effect of this embodiment.

  FIG. 71 (A) shows a state in which the change display of the decorative symbol is being performed in a state in which the pre-reading effect is not performed. FIG. 71 (B) shows a state in which a normal pre-reading effect is executed as a result of the gaming ball winning in the upper starting opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 71 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the pending starting memory is digested and the next variable display is started. At this time, the first continuous pre-reading effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) to (G), the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed each time the suspended start memory is digested and the variable display is started, and the shape of the reserved display is Change.

  Then, when the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 71 (H)), reach is generated (FIG. 71 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 71 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of expectation in the process of continuing the game by enabling the prefetching effect to be performed (change the effect mode) based on the progress of the game. Is possible. In particular, for a variable display game which is executed before the start memory which is the target of the pre-reading effect is digested after the pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening. There is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered, but the mode of the hold display changes every time the variable display game is executed, so that the expectation of the player can be continuously enhanced, and the game interest is lowered. Can be prevented.

13-4. Modified example of special view preview effect]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special view preview effect control]
In addition, it is not necessary to distinguish between normal pre-reading effect and continuous pre-reading effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect), the mode (color) of the holding display changes at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the starting opening, and the second pre-reading effect (continuous pre-reading effect) holds The mode (shape) of the reserve display changes at the time of digestion. In this case, it is determined at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the starting opening only whether or not to execute the continuous pre-reading effect, and the content of the specific effect (change of the holding display) is drawn at the time of the holding process.

  On the other hand, as in the story reach, the contents (scenarios) of all the specific effects may be drawn at the time of the starting winning combination. For example, all special effects are drawn in the special view look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 66). In the process (step S1408) of setting the pre-reading effect execution flag of the reception command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be drawn.

  In addition, when the number of pending storage is 2 or less at the start winning and the variable display is under execution, the number of executions of the continuous pre-reading effect is 1 and when the number of pending memory is 3 or more, the continuous pre-reading effect lottery table ( The mode of continuous pre-reading effect may be selected based on FIG. 68) (all patterns may be made to be able to be covered by the continuous pre-reading effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold indication may be changed in the first pre-reading effect (usually the same as the pre-reading effect), or the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both of the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, if the number of pre-reading effects is one, that is, the mode of the suspension display changes at the start winning combination, and then the mode of the suspension display does not change, it may be an extremely low-gaze effect. That is, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is increased as the number of times of change of the holding mode is increased, but the degree of expectation may be set lower in the case of only one.

13-4-2. Special figure 2 priority digestion]
In the present embodiment, the first special view variation display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 when the gaming ball wins the upper starting opening 2101, and the gaming ball wins the lower starting opening 2102 In this case, a second special view variation display game in which a special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started in the case where the gaming ball has won in the lower starting opening 2102 than in the case where the gaming ball has won in the upper starting opening 2101. Therefore, in the case where the pre-reading effect is executed based on the starting memory in which the game ball is winning in the upper starting opening 2101, if the game ball wins in the lower starting opening 2102, the digestion of the starting memory for the pre-reading effect is delayed. Become.

  As described above, when the variable display of the pre-read object is interrupted, the specific effect performed immediately before may be continuously performed. Alternatively, the specific effect based on the scenario drawn may be executed, and the specific effect to be finally performed may be continuously performed by the amount of interruption.

  Also, the scenario may be reselected as much as it is interrupted. At this time, the range of random numbers may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the executed specific rendering so that the content of the rendering does not become dull, the scenario may be newly drawn, and the executed scenario is ignored. The range of random numbers may be initialized to newly draw a scenario.

  Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the lower starting opening 2102, the specific effect may be executed only in the variable display corresponding to the start memory winning in the upper starting opening 2101 without executing the specific effect.

  In addition, in the case where the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are configured to be simultaneously executable, for example, the specific effect is displayed in accordance with the execution of the first special view variation display game. You just have to do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the normal symbol is won, the game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 2102 by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 and opening and closing the movable piece 2106 However, when the game ball wins alternately in the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102, and the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are alternately executed, an interrupt is generated. It does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as in the case of executing only the first special view variable display game, but since the variable display for up to eight times can be suspended, it is possible to It becomes possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period, and it is possible to execute effects with a variety of variations.

13-4-3. Modified example of special view preview effect mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a special form of structure or a natural thing may be disposed behind the decorative pattern or character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, and the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Modified example of random number lottery]
In the example of effect described above, although the fall is prevented by changing the range (upper limit value, lower limit) for generating the random number, the fall is prevented by other methods Good. A case where pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

  For example, the specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by processing such as calculation without changing the generation range of the random number (that is, keeping the range of “0” to “1000”). May be Hereinafter, specific examples will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect to be executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. In this example, random numbers are set to be generated in the range of “0” to “600” in order to prevent a fall. Here, a random number is generated in the range of “0” to “1000”, and a random number in the range of “0” to “600” is generated by multiplying by “600/1000” (rounding down after the decimal point). be able to.

  Also, when generating random numbers in the range of “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random numbers generated in the range of “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as random number values. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the variation of the random numbers is biased. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range By adding (in this case, 600-400 = 200) to the random value (that is, changing the overlapping range from "200" to "600"), the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectation is set high. Thus, the player's expectation may be enhanced.

  As another example, when generating random numbers in the range of "0" to "1000", generate 10 times the random numbers generated in the range of "0" to "100", and generate each generated random number A random number in the range of "0" to "1000" may be generated by adding. By configuring in this way, the number of random number generations is set and added according to the range of random numbers to be generated, and various random number ranges can be set while keeping the range of random numbers actually generated constant. it can. Also, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, random numbers in the range of “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying the random numbers generated in the range of “0” to “100” by 10 times. Although detailed distribution can not be performed, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. Further, the method of extracting random numbers may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the extracted random numbers may be adjusted as necessary.

  In addition, after extracting the random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed first, the random number for selecting the subsequent specific effect may be added to the random number for selecting the preceding specific effect . At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the random number value after addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be discarded.

[15. Falling allowance (breaking law)]
[15-1. Example of production]
The embodiment described above is configured to be able to prevent a drop in the degree of expectation of the effect contents from being reduced with respect to the specific effects that are continuously executed. However, even if a fall does not occur, the result of the variable display does not necessarily result in a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is executed first, the flow of the subsequent effect is predicted by the player, and it may not be possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Therefore, in the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, a modification will be described in which a fall is allowed, and a change is made to the effect pattern that is normally executed. For example, the condition for permitting the fall may be determined depending on the game state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display or the operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary motorized combination. Specifically, the random number generation range is not adjusted if the probability of the result of the variable display being a big hit is high (high probability state, positive change state), or if it is in a state advantageous to the player such as time saving state. You may allow it to happen. On the contrary, in the case of a state not advantageous to the player other than the definite variation state or the time saving state, the falling may occur without adjusting the generation range of the random number.

  In addition, only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, it is possible to allow a drop. That is, the player can recognize that the big hit is determined in the place where the effect of lowering the degree of expectation is performed and disappointing. As described above, by setting the expectation to be high when the effect not executed in the normal flow is executed, the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to allow the fall (at a low probability) in normal times while controlling so that the fall is unlikely to occur and to increase the probability that the fall occurs when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

  Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not the fall is allowed according to the fluctuation pattern, not the result of the fluctuation display game. For example, in the case where a highly reliable reach (for example, a story reach, an SP reach 3 after simulated continuous rendition, and the like) occurs, the fall may be more likely to occur than the unreliable reach. On the other hand, when a low reliability reach occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a high reliability reach. As described above, not the result of the variable display game but the permission of the fall may be made to correspond to the effect content.

  In addition, the result of the variable display game may allow a drop in the reliability of the fluctuation pattern in the case of a big hit. For example, the fluctuation pattern (reach) of high reliability is set to be more likely to cause falling than when the fluctuation pattern (reach) of low reliability is selected. On the contrary, the variation pattern (reach) of low reliability may be more likely to cause falling than when the variation pattern (reach) of high reliability is selected.

  In addition, when the unclear mode which does not clearly notify whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the definite change state is executed after the big hit game is ended, the random number is only random number when the actual probability state is the normal state. The generation range of may be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is a definite change state, the winning probability of the variable display game is high even if a fall occurs, so that it is less likely to discourage the player, and in a normal state, a fall occurs. Therefore, it is less likely to discourage the player by directing the story reach. On the contrary, only in the case of the positive variation state, the generation range of the random number may be adjusted to prevent the fall. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) by the occurrence of the fall.

  Furthermore, in the indistinct mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when a fall occurs without adjusting the generation range of the random number. In addition, two modes may be set: a mode in which the generation range of random numbers is adjusted to the unclear mode and a mode in which the generation range of random numbers is not adjusted. Furthermore, the player may be allowed to select these modes. By configuring in this manner, the player can select whether the probability state can be recognized early or that effects with less discouragement can be performed.

[15-2. Control example]
Subsequently, control for allowing the fall will be described. In the present embodiment, the generation range of the random numbers is adjusted to prevent a drop, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, in the case where a fall is allowed, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the fall will not occur, but if the fall is to be generated as the notification effect of the big hit, the range of the random numbers may be set so as to always cause the fall. In addition, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set so as to be returned by a predetermined level rather than to a specified value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability of occurrence and the stage of the fall.

  In addition, as described above, random numbers in a predetermined range may be generated in duplicate to generate random numbers in a biased distribution. In this case, the occurrence probability of the fall (rise) may be adjusted by setting the overlap range as a fall generation range or by setting the overlap range to a rise generation range. Furthermore, the range of random numbers generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing), but a numerical value to be added may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal gaming state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability change state). By changing the method of updating the random number counter in this manner, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the falling according to the gaming state.

[16. Processing at power off]
Here, processing in the case of receiving a power-off command or a power-on command in the reception command analysis processing will be described.

  As described above, the power-off command is transmitted to the main control board 4100 when the external power supply is stopped. As described above, before the power-off command is transmitted, the main control board 4100 outputs a power failure notification signal, and the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing is executed to execute processing such as command backup. Is executed.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes processing according to the mode in which the power is shut off. Specifically, when the power supply from the outside is stopped and the power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is shut off, the power supply to the main control board 4100 is shut off only. In this case, the supply of power may be interrupted only to the peripheral control board 4140. Each case will be described below.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is powered off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to a factor such as a poor contact of the wiring, the game control in the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, when the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is not lost, that is, when the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, as described above, the hot start As (1), effect control resumes (continues).

  Note that, even when effect control is resumed by hot start, notification may be made that power supply is temporarily shut off in the peripheral control board 4140. The notification of power supply interruption may display the initial screen at the time of power activation, for example, and may display the screen which notifies that the power supply was interrupted.

  In addition, there may be a gap between the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140 due to the shutoff of the power supply. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of the change of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the change display of the decoration symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when the special figure tuning effect end command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of fluctuation, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than a big hit, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

  In addition, when the power is shut off at the time of execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing of receiving the special winning opening closing display command or the ending command indicating that the game proceeds to the next round.

  If the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written to the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and effect control is restarted as a cold start.

  When the effect (variation pattern) with the specific effect is performed at the timing when the effect control is resumed as a cold start, the execution of the series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the lottery result of the scenario may be discarded to re-lotter the scenario. When drawing a scenario at the time of each specific effect execution, draw a scenario for executing the subsequent specific effects until the timing when all the last specific effects are finished, so that no problem occurs in the content of each specific effect. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be performed. Note that whether the cold start or the hot start is performed, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power of the peripheral control board is shut off.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is shut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, a power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display in progress to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) at the time of power-off. Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is resumed, a command to notify the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power on command. The command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power on command.

  When the gaming state notified along with the power on command matches the currently-executed effect content, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, when it is not possible to return to the effect screen only with the information notified together with the power on command, an effect is performed such that the player does not misunderstand. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect in execution is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed or a round effect in the big hit game. For the effect that the player does not misidentify, for example, during the change display of the decorative symbol, all the decorative symbols are changed at high speed, or the special decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, when in the big hit game, it is only necessary to indicate that the big hit game is in progress without displaying the number of rounds.

  In addition, if the game state and the display state currently being rendered are different, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to restore the normal state. The abnormality notification screen may be displayed as long as the player can recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, when the fluctuation display is being executed by the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and the execution of the subsequent specific effects is performed even when the continuous pre-reading effect is continuing (lottery of scenario ) Is discontinued.

16-3. When the power of the main control board and peripheral control board is shut off]
When the power supply to the gaming machine is shut off, power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from the backup power supply, and the content stored in the RAM is held for a predetermined period. As described above, a power-off command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied again to the gaming machine, the main control board 4100 transmits a power on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, when the game control state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and the game is not in the game stop state, such as waiting for customers, the peripheral control board 4140 is an effect of notifying that the power is shut off. After performing the above, the game is switched to an effect such as not to give a false recognition to a player such as a customer wait. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to restore the normal state. In this case, when the variable display is being executed by the pseudo continuous change or the change pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and the subsequent specific effect is executed even when the continuous pre-reading effect is continuing (lottery of scenario ) Is discontinued.

16-4. Summary at power off]
By configuring as described above, is it possible to continue the execution of the fluctuation display with the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach even when the power supply to the main control substrate 4100 or the peripheral control substrate 4140 is shut off? It can be judged appropriately whether or not.

[17. General drawing look-ahead effect]
Subsequently, normal symbol type pre-reading effect (general drawing pre-reading effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100, a regular drawing pre-reading effect is executed. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of common-play look-ahead effect control processing according to the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a common drawing prefetching effect according to the present embodiment.

  When the regular drawing look-ahead effect control process is started, the production control program first determines whether a common drawing look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2201). The common drawing pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received as described above. Since the rendering control program does not execute the rendering general-purpose rendering effect when the general-playing configuration rendering execution flag is not set (the result at step S2201 is "No"), the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, the effect control program determines whether or not the generic view prefetching effect is currently being executed (step S2201: "Yes") if the regular diagram prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2202). If the regular drawing prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is "Yes"), the processing after step S2207 is executed in order to continue the normal drawing prefetching effect being executed.

  If the rendering control program is not currently executing the regular drawing look-ahead effect (the result at step S2202 is "No"), it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the common view pre-reading effect is established (step S2203). The execution condition of the common drawing prefetching effect is determined, for example, depending on the game state, the execution condition of other effects, and the like. If the execution condition of the regular drawing look-ahead effect is not satisfied (the result at step S2203 is "No"), the presentation control program clears the general drawing look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the regular drawing pre-reading effect is performed is not particularly limited. For example, it may be performed independently of the execution state of the variation display (special figure tuning effect) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the common-play look-ahead effect is executed. In addition, the execution timing of the common view pre-reading effect may be the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, even while the special figure pre-reading effect is being performed, the regular drawing pre-reading effect may be performed in parallel.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the generic drawing prefetching effect can be executed even when a command (normal symbol type prefetching rendering command) instructing the execution of the regular drawing prefetching effect is received from the main control board 4100 Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, reach effect, etc.) is being executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the common view prefetching effect, the execution condition of the common view prefetching effect is The execution of the common view pre-reading effect may be regulated as a failure. In addition, when the advance notice effect of the special lottery is being executed, the execution of the advance notice effect of the normal lottery is restricted by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 so that a plurality of types of advance notice effects are not simultaneously executed. It is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), the star-shaped popular drawing prefetch effect area is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen and the symbol is configured to be variably displayed in the area (see FIG. 73B). Fig. 73 (C). Then, as a result of the variable display, the symbols corresponding to the hit (“O”, FIG. 73 (D)) and the symbols corresponding to the disconnection (“-”, FIG. 73 (E)) are stopped and displayed. Is notified. The player may shoot the game ball by aiming at the lower starting opening 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit in the popular figure pre-reading effect area is stopped. Also, when the symbol indicating a hit is stopped, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball by aiming at the lower starting opening 2102. At this time, in order to secure a time for the player to aim at the lower starting opening 2102 and to fire it, the effect control program has a result of the popular drawing pre-reading effect a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left and right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the normal lottery, the player is determined according to the degree of advantage for the player (the easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting opening 2102). It may be determined whether or not the condition for executing the figure pre-reading effect is satisfied. For example, as a movable aspect of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set long (long open) or set so that the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is increased. At this time, only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player such as long release, the general drawing prefetch notice may be executed.

  Further, it is possible to define a plurality of types of symbols other than hit and deviation, and to set the stop symbol in accordance with the degree of expectation that the normal lottery becomes a big hit. Furthermore, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable aspect of the movable piece 2106. If the movable piece 2106 moves in the long open mode as a result of the common drawing lottery being hit, the stop symbol notified as a hit is set, and in the case of a short time open mode, it is neither hit nor off It may be a stop symbol of

  In addition, in the case of the short time state in which the variation time of the normal symbol is short, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect may not be executed. The probability of winning is high, and even if the result of the ordinary lottery is foreclosed, there is little profit for the player, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, so that the time to execute the generic drawing look-ahead effect can not be secured sufficiently. That is, whether or not to execute the regular drawing prefetch effect may be determined according to the game state.

  The performance control program displays a general drawing look-ahead effect area (step S2204) when an execution condition of the common drawing look-ahead effect is satisfied (the result at step S2203 is "Yes"). Then, in order to set a time for fluctuating display of symbols in the popular drawing pre-reading effect, the common drawing pre-reading effect timer is set (step S2205), and the common drawing pre-reading effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the common-mode look-ahead effect timer times up may be fixed, may be according to the gaming state, may be according to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or may be a combination of these.

  Furthermore, the effect control program determines whether or not the regular drawing look-ahead presentation timer has timed out (step S2207) when the regular drawing look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is "yes"). If the regular drawing pre-reading effect timer has not timed out (the result of step S2207 is "no"), the regular drawing pre-reading effect is continued, so this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in order to display the pre-reading result of the common drawing lottery when the common drawing pre-reading effect timer is up (the result of step S2207 is “Yes”), the production control program causes the symbol in fluctuation to be stopped and displayed ( Step S2208). Finally, the common drawing pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this processing is ended.

  In addition, although the common drawing pre-screening effect described above is performed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, it may be performed on the screen of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition to displaying on the display device, the general drawing pre-reading effect is performed with a plurality of effect devices, such as operating the movable role, emitting light such as a lamp or emitting light from a speaker, etc. It may be possible or may be a combination of these multiple rendering devices. In the case of executing a common drawing prefetching effect by combining a plurality of rendering devices, the common drawing prefetching effect is to be executed by any one of a plurality of rendering devices other than when performing simultaneously by a plurality of rendering devices May be For example, when performing a common view prefetching effect by screen display and voice output, a state in which the common pattern prefetching effect can not be executed by the screen display (for example, when another (prefetching) effect is being executed during error notification) In the case of), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the common drawing pre-reading effect by the audio output is performed. Also, instead of restricting the execution of the common view prefetching effect, the common view prefetching effect may be performed overlapping with other effects. In this case, the effect mode of the common view pre-reading effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be translucent to perform the general-play prefetching effect, or the volume may be narrowed to perform audio output.

[18. Effect etc]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by continuously changing the range of random number values according to the gaming state, etc., contradiction-free continuous effects such as prevention of falling without complicating control are executed. can do.

  In addition, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag for executing the specific effect and the random number initial value are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, the case where the power supply is shut off during the execution of the effect and the effect can not be continued.

  In addition, when there is a starting winning combination that generates a big hit or a small hitting etc during the execution of the effect, if there is a starting winning combination that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation), Even when the transition condition of the state (game mode) is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variable display based on the game ball winning in the lower starting opening 2102 mentioned above has priority over the case where the upper starting opening 2101 wins, the result of the variable display preferentially executed is When the above initialization condition such as a big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent specific rendition from being interrupted and reopened in a halfway state by occurrence of an event such as occurrence of a big hit or change in gaming state.

  Further, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent a fall but also to execute an effect that is continuously performed and has an order.

  For example, the present invention may be applied to the case of selecting an effect for each round in a big hit game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the content of the effect may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every 3 rounds of 15 rounds of big hit games). In addition, common rendering may be performed until a round on the way (for example, seven rounds in fifteen rounds), and for the subsequent rounds (for example, eight rounds or later), the content of the rendering may be selected. At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game to be executed after the end of the big hit game includes start memory that becomes a big hit, a special hit is selected by the effect pattern that is easy to be executed, It may be suggested (informed) to the player that there is a certain.

  As described above, according to the feature of the present invention, by dynamically changing the range of random number values according to the gaming state etc., it is possible to execute a rich variety of effects without complicating control. Become.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, there is no need to hold a notice lottery table that covers all of the selection patterns of the specific effects in the story reach, the pseudo continuous fluctuation, and the continuous pre-reading effect, so the storage capacity increases with diversification of effects. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special drawing look-ahead (judgment and presentation)]
Here, control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special view prefetch determination and control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits special view prefetch effect are described.

[19-1. Control on the main control board side (prohibition of special drawing pre-reading judgment)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special view prefetching among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 74 is an example of a table showing a modified example of the “8-10. Other” command described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 tuning effect relation” described in FIG. 15 and the special figure 2 command of “8-2. Special figure 2 tuning effect relation” It is an example of a table showing details. Description of the same configuration as that described above is omitted.

  The starting opening winning combination command instructs the start of the starting opening winning arrangement. Here, when the gaming ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower starting based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 When the game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to "02H".

  Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing at which the number of special symbols 1 is changed (the increase timing of the number of reservations (number of starting memories) due to game ball winning at upper starting opening 2101) or at upper special symbol indicator 1185 A special symbol 1 memory command is sent to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the reduction timing of the number of reservations due to variable display, and further, when the number of special symbol 1 reservations increases (at the time of winning the game ball to the upper starting opening 2101) special symbol One hold count specification command has been sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pending number information, and the mode values "00H" to "04H" are set accordingly. Also, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number specification command notifies the presence or absence of pre-reading effect as well as the hold number at the time of increase. The special symbol 1 hold number specification command indicates "pre-read" information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is "1", and "pre-read no" information when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". It represents. And, when the special symbol 1 reservation number designated command is “pre-read”, it also plays a role of instructing the start of the pre-reading effect. In addition, a special symbol 2 memory command and a special symbol 2 holding number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 74), the command to be transmitted is different between the case where the special symbol 1 holding number decreases (at the start of fluctuation) and the case where it increases (at the start opening winning). Special symbol 1 memory command at the start of fluctuation that indicates the number of balls held at the timing when the special symbol 1 number of reservations decreased (the timing of decrease in the number of reservations due to variable display on the special symbol display 1185), that is, the start timing of the variable display Is sent. Therefore, the variation start time special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holdings decreases has 0 to 3 holding number information, and the mode values "01H" to "04H" are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the special symbol 1 reserve number increases (the increase timing of the reserve number due to the game ball winning in the upper starting opening 2101), the prefetch special symbol 1 memory prefetch command is sent to indicate the number of reserve balls and presence / absence of pre-reading Ru. Therefore, the pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command transmitted when the number of holdings increases has 1 to 4 pieces of holding number information, and the mode values "* 2H" to "* 5 H" are set accordingly. Note that the upper 4 bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” in the case of “prefetching none” and “1” is set in the case of “prefetching available”. The setting of the presence / absence information of the pre-reading is performed in the process (“pre-reading nothing”) of step S242 and the process (“pre-reading existence”) of step S280 of the storage pre-reading process (FIG. 76) described later. Pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reservation number designated command (Figure 16), the information which is transmitted to peripheral control MPU 4150a is the same, but setting of status value and mode value which composes command is It is different. The special symbol 2 storage command at the start of fluctuation and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch command at the time of pre-reading are the same configurations as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Moreover, only when there is pre-reading (that is, when the head address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command is “1” at pre-reading), the symbol type pre-reading command, fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and fluctuation type A lookahead command is sent. In the modification, the change distribution table information prefetching command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modification, a process of setting the transmission of the variation distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the storage prefetch process (FIG. 24) described above.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76, storage prefetching processing of the modification will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of storage prefetching processing of the modification. The processes common to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24) are assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  In the modification, as described above, the variation distribution table information prefetching command is transmitted when the prefetching determination is performed. Therefore, main control MPU 4100a sets the command (pattern type pre-reading command, variation pattern pre-reading command and variation type pre-reading command) indicating the pre-reading result in the command buffer for transmitting to peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278) At the same time, the variation distribution table information prefetching command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The variation distribution table information prefetching command will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the command acquired in the process of step S284 is targeted for the special symbol storage prefetch command (FIG. 74) at the time of prefetching the corresponding special view. As described above, the pre-read special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is the same as the special symbol 1 (2) number-of-holds designation command (FIG. 16) and the same information is stored.

  It returns to FIG. The symbol type pre-reading command is removed according to the result of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory pre-reading process (FIG. 76). It is a command to specify a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the result of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation. There is a special figure 1 (2) symbol classification command as a command which designates a specific big hit and a non-specific big hit. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  The mode values of the symbol type pre-reading command (FIG. 74) and the special view 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 75) are associated with a missing or big hit symbol type 0 to 48, respectively. For the symbol type pre-reading command, the mode value “01H” is set for removal, and the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for each symbol type for jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating a specific jackpot, and not specified The same mode value "50H" is set for jackpot symbol types 45 to 48 indicating a jackpot (small jackpot). On the other hand, for special hit 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each symbol type also for big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating non-specific big hit (small hit) .

  As described above, the variation pattern pre-reading command is a command for specifying an effect pattern (variation pattern). The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the memory pre-reading process (FIG. 76). It is set using. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used to set the rendering mode from a plurality of them, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is used to set the detailed rendering content (rendering pattern) according to the rendering mode set.

  The fluctuation type pre-reading command is a command for specifying information (addition value of time) as to whether or not pseudo continuous fluctuation is to be performed on the set fluctuation pattern. The addition value of time is set using the random number for fluctuation type in the fluctuation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage pre-reading process (FIG. 76). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not performed by the fluctuation type random number, the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern is maintained. Also, when it is determined that the pseudo-continuous variation is performed by the variation type random number, the pseudo-continuous according to the variation type (any one of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern by the variation type random number The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the additional value of time is associated in accordance with the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous variation, the number of times of execution is determined for each type, whereby the value of time of addition is set. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous variation is performed, the variation time set in the variation pattern is extended.

  The variation distribution table information prefetch command is a command for specifying a variation distribution table used when determining a variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of variation. As described above, in the variation distribution table, the big hit variation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit (“yes” in step S350), but in the case of performing reach effect (step Reach variation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372, and outlier variation selection information table ((no in step S372) when out of reach effect is to be performed (“no” in step S372) Non-reach distribution table) is provided. The fluctuation distribution table at the start of fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold determination random number for reach determination that may change the result of reach determination whether or not to perform reach effect if the number of held balls changes between pre-reading and fluctuation start time (start memory It is a table set for).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the merit of transmitting the variation distribution table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands will be described. FIG. 77 is an example of a schematic flowchart simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table (A) variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) described above, and (B) according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of the reach execution possibility table.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, the big hit determination is performed by the big hit determination random number, and if it is a big hit, a big hit distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is out, the reach determination is performed by the reach determination random number. In reach determination, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is larger than the comparison value. It is set. Thereafter, the rendering mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the rendering mode.

  In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold) fluctuates according to the number of holding balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is 4 is 10, and the comparison value is incremented by 10 each time the number of holding balls decreases. In this case, if the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table will be set regardless of the number of holding balls from 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the reach determination result differs according to the number of holding balls, so either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. If the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of holding balls.

  Therefore, the mode value of the variation distribution table information prefetch command is “01H” when the big hit determination result is a big hit, and “02 H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 when it is out of reach when the reach determination random number is a reach determination random number. When "10" is 10 to 49, "04H" is set when the reach determination random number is 50 or more.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits the change distribution table information pre-read command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the pre-read time, so that the pre-read time and the change start time with respect to the hold of the mode value "03H". If the number of balls held changes, it is possible to execute the prefetch effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of reach determination may be different. In the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76), when the mode value of the variation distribution table information prefetching command is "03H", the process of setting the hold command reference value at the time of prefetching in step S280 is not performed. The state in which the hold command reference value at the time of no pre-reading in S242 is set may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs the pre-reading determination but does not transmit the pre-reading determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, the special symbol 1 (2) "pre-read nothing" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the pre-reading effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 (lower starting port 2102) Information on whether or not to perform pre-reading effect (“pre-read available” or “pre-read nothing”) is included together with the ball number information. Then, only in the case of "pre-read", the symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command and the variation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and in the case of "pre-reading none" these pre-reading commands are not transmitted . If peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control board 4140 receives only the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) transmitted at the time of starting opening winning a prize, without waiting for reception of other prefetch commands It can be determined whether it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a "pre-read" special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) (when it receives a specific game information), it receives other prefetch command and prefetch effects After setting the execution flag (step S1408 in the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) and executing the process (first pre-processing) for establishing the execution condition of the prefetch effect, the special view prefetch effect control process (FIG. 42) Step S1027, second pre-processing) is executed, and pre-reading effect is executed. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the "not read ahead" special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command), it can grasp that the prefetch command will not be transmitted later, and so on. It is possible to immediately interrupt the non-execution decision (does not set the pre-reading effect execution flag) of the pre-reading effect without waiting for the reception of the pre-reading command. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a will execute the special view prefetch effect control process (FIG. 66) which is the second preliminary process without performing the first preliminary process, and the prefetch effect execution flag is set. Since there is nothing ("No" in step S2001), the special drawing preview effect control process is ended without executing the prefetch effect.

  In addition, when the pre-reading determination is not performed on the main control board 4100 side (when the “pre-reading no” command is received), a command necessary for setting of pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board 4140 (pattern type pre-reading command, change Since the pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command and the variation distribution table information pre-reading command) are not sent, the command sent at the time of starting opening prize winning (pre-reading) becomes simple and peripheral control MPU 4150a executes pre-reading effect Mis-control can be prevented in advance. Further, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit presence / absence information of pre-reading to the peripheral control board 4140 against a defect of pre-reading effect that may occur in the progress of the game. It can facilitate implementation. A condition in which “pre-read no” is set to the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command (that is, a condition under which the main control board 4100 prohibits pre-read) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the symbol type pre-reading command that is sent at the time of starting opening winning (pre-reading), the specified big hit (first specified result) with the operation of the condition device is different mode value is set for each specific big hit type A non-specific big hit (second specific result) which is a so-called small hit without the operation of the device is set to a common mode value regardless of the non-specific big hit type. That is, when the prefetch determination result is a specific big hit (first specific result), the main control board 4100 performs peripheral control board 4140 with a command (first specific information) in which the mode value is set so as to be able to specify the type of specific big hit. If the pre-read determination result is a non-specified jackpot (second specified result), a non-specified jackpot type can not be specified and a command (second specified information) in which the mode value is unified is transmitted. And special mode 1 (2) symbol classification command transmitted at the time of a change start is set a mode value which is different for every non-specific big hit kind also as non-specific big hit. As a result, it is not possible to grasp the type even for the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the fluctuation with respect to a non-specific big-hit, which is a so-called small hit, until the fluctuation start time. There is no fear of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a preread effect that moderately increases the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game.

  For example, the large winning opening is opened at the opportunity of a small hit, and has a V zone winning structure of two types of feathers in which a big hit occurs by a game ball winning (V winning) to a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening. In pachinko machines, the ease of winning a game ball to a specific area varies depending on the type of small hit. That is, it determines whether or not a big hit can be derived depending on the type of the small hit. In addition, since the type of jackpot derived is different according to the type of small hit, the benefits (such as the number of time savings) that the player can acquire are different. For this reason, small hit type information becomes more important for the player. In such a pachinko machine, if a preread effect capable of grasping the type of small hit is performed, the player can make a hit according to the type of small hit, and it becomes possible to easily aim for a big hit or a specific benefit. Therefore, by not performing the pre-reading effect according to the small hit type, the player is prevented from being given any predictable element (information) until the fluctuation start. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Prohibition condition of pre-reading judgment]
FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing a condition under which (A) the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for describing an effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition.

  In the memory prefetching process (FIG. 76) described above, if the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing of the start winning of the gaming ball and the timing when the variation is actually started ("yes" in step S244), If the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set even if the table does not change ("yes" in step S246), pre-reading determination is prohibited. Then, when the pre-reading determination is prohibited, "pre-reading nothing" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability at the start winning combination is the probability at the start of variation There are a case where it is different from the state, or a case where the time saving state at the start winning combination becomes the non time saving state at the time of the fluctuation start, etc. Indicates when (the number of games) falls within 4 times. In this case, the pre-reading judgment is prohibited regardless of the type of special symbol.

  In addition, when it is the pre-reading judgment prohibition period ("yes" in step S246), the game state at the time of the game ball winning to the upper starting opening (special figure 1 starting opening) 2101 is time saving state or the operation of condition device The case where it is a big hit game state accompanied by, or the game state at the time of the game ball prize to the lower starting opening (special figure 2 start opening) 2102 is the case where it is non-short time state or big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball winning (generation of special symbol 2 suspension) to the lower starting opening (special figure 2 starting opening) 2102 is limited to the short time state, the lower starting opening (special figure 2) The start determination is prohibited when the gaming state at the time of the game ball winning to the starting opening 2102 is the non-time-short state (the state where the time-saving state is not). In addition, even if it makes a pre-reading judgment for the special symbol retention which occurred during the big hit game, during the big hit game it becomes the normal (low) probability state and non time saving state regardless of the game state until then, the special symbol There is a high possibility that it is different from the gaming state (the gaming state after the big hit game) when the suspension is digested, and there is a concern that the accuracy of the pre-read determination may be lowered. For this reason, even when the gaming state at the time of the game ball winning at the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (at the time of special symbol suspension occurrence) is a big hit game, the prefetch determination is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (B), when the state A is shifted to the state B triggered by 100 times of variable digestion, the number of times the state A is maintained (the number of remaining fluctuations) becomes 4 (97 in the state A Proactive judgment is prohibited at the start of the second fluctuation). Then, the period from the state A to the state B is referred to as a pre-reading determination prohibition period.

  The prize 1 that occurs immediately before the 97th fluctuation in state A is started is digested as the 97th fluctuation if there is no suspension in all of the suspension memories 1 to 4 areas, but is suspended in the suspension memories 1 to 3 areas If there is, it is stored in the pending storage area 2-4 respectively as the second and fourth pending states. And it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuation. In addition, if suspension is stored in all of the suspension storages 1 to 4, it is an overflow winning and is not stored.

  In this way, in the winning 1, the change is executed in the state A even when the change digestion is late. When there is no state transition between winning and fluctuation start, the prefetch information (big hit judgment result, fluctuation pattern, etc.) determined by winning is not different from the fluctuation information determined at the start of fluctuation. However, it is possible that, after winning 1, that is, winning 2 that occurred after the 97th fluctuation start in state A, the state may be shifted between winning and fluctuation start depending on the number of holding balls at the time of winning occurrence. . If there are three balls held when winning 2 occurs and prize 2 is stored in the pending storage 4 area as the fourth pending, even if it is state A at the time of winning, state B at the start of fluctuation It becomes. In this case, the prefetching information determined at the time of winning and the fluctuation information determined at the start of fluctuation may not be the same because the conditions used as the basis of various judgments are different. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous for the player than the state B, the preread effect based on the preread information is actually a variation with a low degree of expectation although the effect with a high degree of expectation is performed. Events can occur that cause the player to be greatly discouraged.

  Therefore, a period in which a state transition can occur between winning and fluctuation start depending on the number of balls held at the time of winning, that is, 100th fluctuation after the 97th fluctuation start in state A, and the state A to state Pre-reading is prohibited for the period until it shifts to B. As described above, the pre-reading effect is prevented from being performed when the period until the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is changed becomes a predetermined period (here, the remaining number of times the state is maintained 4 fluctuations). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by executing the (prediction) pre-read effect compared to the actual change, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the pre-read effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, state transition includes transition from high probability state to normal probability state by ST frequency digestion, transition from short status to non-time short status by time-delayed digestion, status transition by effect mode transition according to fluctuation frequency, etc. Be If it is possible that the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern may change depending on winnings (pre-reading) and fluctuation start due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a does not make pre-reading judgment, but has won the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. Only the number of balls held for special symbol corresponding to the starting opening and information without read ahead are transmitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a performs the read ahead prohibition control at the time of such state transition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally grasps the remaining number of times of time reduction, for example, when power failure occurs and the power is restored during the time reduction state. Because it is not possible, it becomes possible to execute pre-reading effect which has been prohibited after power recovery. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the short time state and the non-short time state. Further, although the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of changes (time reduction number) in the time reduction state, time reduction number information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information in the short time state, but can not grasp the progress status of the short time state (the number of remaining short times). For this reason, even if it is attempted to prohibit the pre-reading effect when the number of remaining time reductions before the status transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state is four or less, the determination can not be made, and the time saving state ends after power recovery. I had no choice but to prohibit pre-reading. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs read ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. Since the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the pre-reading determination when the remaining number of shorts before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time reducing state becomes 4 times (predetermined number of times) or less, the pre-reading command necessary for pre-reading effect is peripheral It does not transmit to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform pre-reading effect. Accordingly, even when the power failure occurs in the short time state and the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the prefetching effect in the short time state according to the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period in which the pre-reading effect is not performed, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the game.

  Also, in the explanation of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command (FIG. 74, FIG. 77), if the mode value is “03H”, the result of reach determination is that the number of holding balls fluctuates between prefetching and fluctuation start time. It has been mentioned above that there is a possibility of different, i.e. the table for selecting the variation pattern may change. Whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern may change depending on the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of holding balls. If the special symbol reach probability is determined in advance, these values can be acquired without setting the variation distribution table information prefetching command by the prefetching determination. In such a case, it may be determined whether or not to make a prefetch target before executing the prefetch determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage prefetch process (FIG. 76). If there is a possibility that either the reach or non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the table for selecting the variation pattern is different ("yes" in step 244).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, the special symbol 2 suspension is prioritized over the special symbol 1 suspension, and the upper limit of four can be reserved and stored, so the number of states maintained before transition (the number of games) is Pre-reading is prohibited when remaining four times or less, but it is not limited to this. According to the specification applied to the pachinko machine 1, the number of times of determination threshold (here four times) may be changed. Further, the control not to execute the special view prefetching determination performed on the main control board side described above may be control not to perform the special view prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Control on the peripheral control board side (prohibition of special effect pre-reading effect)]
Subsequently, control will be described in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits special view look-ahead effects.

  In the above, the special view prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described, but the prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is insufficient to prevent the occurrence of a defect relating to the prefetching effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the main control MPU 4100a can grasp power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a can not grasp it. The main control MPU 4100a transmits the information on the number of holding balls to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a hold at the time of the power interruption, but the pre-reading information (result information, fluctuation pattern, etc. for the number of holding balls) The content of the command is not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can not execute the pre-reading effect with respect to the hold upon power interruption which has been on hold at the time of power interruption. Further, the pre-reading information for the hold occurring after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, but there is a concern in the execution of the pre-reading effect of the hold occurring after the power recovery until all the hold upon power failure is digested.

  For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and suspension when power loss is suspended is included in the low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a determines the prefetching determination of a suspension occurring after a power recovery. Although executed in the high probability state, the probability state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state due to the fluctuation execution of the corresponding hold. That is, when the hold generated after power recovery is digested, it is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-playing effect on hold generated after the power recovery is a high expectation effect, the fluctuation effect on hold is usually likely to be an off-play effect, and the player's expectation will be significantly betrayed and the game is There is a risk that the interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even when the special view prefetch command is received until the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (eight times) is started after power-on including power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the upper limit number of special symbol 1 suspension and special symbol 2 suspension. Further, as described above, the pre-reading effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received pre-reading time variation distribution table information command is “03H”. Below, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the pre-reading effect prohibition control by peripheral control MPU 4150a of modification 1 is explained.

  In addition, as a modification 2, when there is an unknown hold (power hold) at power on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even when receiving the special view prefetch command until the unknown hold is digested. Do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives "pre-read nothing" pre-read special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command as well as the gaming state, it treats the hold of the command as unknown hold and similarly , Prohibits pre-reading effect until the unknown hold is digested. Below, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 84, the pre-reading effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the modification 2 will be described.

[19-2-1. Modified example 1 (prediction of the predetermined number of fluctuations is prohibited when the power is turned on)]
First, Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of an example of the received command analysis process of the first modification. It is to be noted that the same processing as the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 48) is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description will be omitted. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an example of the prefetching prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

  As described above, in the reception command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets various commands from the main control board 4100 in the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided on the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and a process according to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is a power-on state command (Yes in step S 1421), peripheral control MPU 4150 a sets an 8-change read ahead prohibition flag after turn-on and a flag corresponding to other commands (see Step S1422), finish the received command analysis process. After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (instruction start and instruction of the gaming state) according to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140 when the main control board 4100 is powered on. Therefore, the command that the peripheral control board 4140 first receives after power on is the power on state command.

  Then, if the read command is a special map change pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes preread prohibition count processing (step S1430). Thereafter, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing is ended.

  Here, the prefetch prohibition counting process will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-reading prohibition count process is a process for setting to make it possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started to be executed eight times after power-on, even when a special drawing pre-reading command is received.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the 8 variation prefetching prohibition flag after insertion is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set in the subtraction pre-read inhibit count provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). After that, the 8 variation prefetching prohibition flag after loading is canceled (step S1433). Thereby, after the power is turned on, the setting of the prefetch prohibition count is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game.

  In addition, when the post-turn-on 8 variation prefetching prohibition flag is not set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to the process of step S1434 described later.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is decremented by 1 and updated (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process is ended. On the other hand, if the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count process is ended as it is.

  Description will be made along with the passage of time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → step S1432 → step S1433 is executed in step S1431 at the first start of fluctuation, and setting of a prefetch prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after power on is performed. After that, the process of No → step S1435 is executed in step S1434, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the time of the second start of fluctuation, the processing of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “6”. The same processing is repeated at the time of the third to eighth change start, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “0” at the eighth change start. Therefore, at the start of the subsequent fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 → Yes in step S1434 is repeated.

  As described above, in the pre-reading prohibition count process, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-reading prohibition state is made from the value of the pre-reading prohibition count by linking the value of the pre-reading prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after power on. .

  Return to FIG. Peripheral control MPU 4150a, the read command is a special figure pre-reading effect command (pre-reading with special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command, pre-reading symbol type pre-reading command, pre-reading variation pattern pre-reading command, pre-reading variation type pre-reading command In the case of (pre-reading time change distribution table information command) (Yes in step S1407), an ambiguity command (reach or non-reach distribution table with a status value "69H" and a mode value "03H" as the special view prefetch effect command It is determined whether or not the pre-reading time-variation distribution table information command (indicating a command) is received (step S1441). Then, when the vague command has been received (Yes in step S1441), since the pre-reading effect is not executed, the reception command analysis process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, if it has received a preread time change distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the preread prohibition count is It is determined whether it is "0" (step S1442). Then, if the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), the variable is not started eight times after the power is turned on (due to the prefetch prohibition state), the prefetch effect is not executed. Therefore, the reception command analysis process is ended as it is.

  In addition, when the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), peripheral control MPU 4150 a instructs execution of prefetch effect since the start of eight fluctuation after power on is completed. The figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis process is ended. When the special view look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a special view look-ahead effect in the special view look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the settings you need to

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect prohibition control of the first modification, the pre-reading effect is not performed until the predetermined number of fluctuation start times, which is the pending upper limit number, is performed after the power is turned on. For this reason, the suspension at the time of power failure does not affect the pre-reading effect of the suspension occurring after the power recovery. Therefore, the problems as described above can be solved, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game and to provide an appropriate pre-reading effect. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set to the total upper limit number of special symbol 1 suspension and special symbol 2 suspension, it is possible to permit pre-reading effect after the suspension at the time of power-off has been properly digested (variation start).

  In addition, although pre-production effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on by the recovery from power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on when executing the RAM clear on the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 transmits a command that distinguishes the two, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the process. However, prohibiting the pre-reading effect until the time of the RAM clearing where the task does not occur may also cause the interest of the game to decrease. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether the RAM is cleared or not, and when the RAM is cleared, the pre-reading effect may be permitted. By canceling the unnecessary pre-reading effect prohibition in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game and to provide appropriate pre-reading effect.

  For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and suspension when power loss is suspended is included in the low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a determines the prefetching determination of a suspension occurring after a power recovery. Although executed in the high probability state, the probability state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state due to the fluctuation execution of the corresponding hold. That is, when the hold generated after power recovery is digested, it is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-playing effect on hold generated after the power recovery is a high expectation effect, the fluctuation effect on hold is usually likely to be an off-play effect, and the player's expectation will be significantly betrayed and the game is There is a risk that the interest will decline.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (prefetching prohibited until unknown pending detention)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of an example of the received command analysis process of the second modification. The processes common to the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of an example of the special-figure prefetching execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the same as the hold at the time of power on in the first modification (hold at power failure) and the special symbol 1 (2) memory prefetching of prefetching without prefetching from the main control board 4100. The holding when the command is received is treated as "unknown holding" in which the pre-reading information for executing the pre-reading effect is unknown. Then, the pre-reading effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is digested.

  The received command analysis process of the modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the read ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown hold (in unknown flag setting). The process is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the input unknown flag setting process (step S1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the number of special chart 1 reservations (number of unknown reservations) and the number of special 2 reservations (unknown reservations to the special 1 unknown count and special 2 unknown count of the subtraction method provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. The number is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from power failure, the number of reservations at power failure is set as power recovery information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special one unknown count is “0” (step S1452). Then, if the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), the special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of pre-reading effect of special 1 suspension is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. Do. On the other hand, if the special one unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special one unknown hold at the time of power failure, or that it is the initial start, not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (step S1454). Then, if the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1454), the special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of pre-reading effect of special 2 suspension is set (step S1455), and the unknown flag setting processing at the time of input Finish. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply, or that it is an initial start, not at power recovery. Because the flag is not set, the input unknown flag setting process is ended.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) based on the presence or absence of unknown holding is performed for each special symbol according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power cut off, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting of the special symbol to be a target of the hold on power cut off is performed.

  It returns to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes unknown count processing (step S1460) when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special view fluctuation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). Thereafter, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing is ended.

  Here, the unknown counting process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether or not the read ahead prohibition is canceled (clear the unknown flag) by the digestion of unknown pending. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol of the change start target is subtracted to make a judgment on the determination of unknown holding (decision judgment of the pre-reading effect prohibition), and if it is digested, the unknown flag (pre-reading effect prohibition) is canceled .

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). Then, when the unknown flag of the target special view is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the unknown flag of the target special figure is set (Yes at step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a subtracts 1 from the unknown count of the target special figure and updates it (step S1462). It is determined whether the unknown count in the figure is "0" (step S1463). Then, when the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1463), the unknown count processing is ended. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special view is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count processing is ended.

  As described above, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value is associated with the variation count (number of pending balls when unknown pending information is received) until the unknown pending is digested, and the unknown count indicates presence / absence of unknown pending Clear the unknown flag when the value of becomes 0. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not prefetching is prohibited from the state of the unknown flag in the special drawing prefetching execution determination process (step S1470 in FIG. 81, FIG. 84) described later I am able to do that.

  It returns to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the hold at the time of power failure but also the hold when the read ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage read ahead command is not read from the main control board 4100 is treated as "unknown hold". Therefore, setting of the unknown flag (prediction effect prohibition setting) due to the occurrence of unknown holding is performed not only when the power is turned on, but also prefetching of holding (game ball winning for the upper starting opening 2101 and lower starting opening 2102) occurring after the power is turned on. It is also done when a command is received.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command indicating the number of balls held at the time of starting opening winning occurrence and the presence or absence of pending prefetch information generated Yes in step S1469), a special drawing prefetch execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special view pre-reading execution judgment processing, the unknown flag by special symbol is set according to the presence or absence of pre-reading information of the received command (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) or pre-reading effect execution according to the state of pre-reading information and unknown flag Set a flag.

  Here, the details of the special drawing prefetch execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is a command targeting the special symbol 1 (step S1471). Then, if it is the command of the special symbol 1 (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is "pre-read" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the beginning of the mode value of the received special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is “1”.

  Then, if the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is not “prefetched” (No at step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects another prefetch command (lookahead symbol type prefetch command, prefetch variation pattern). Since the pre-reading command, pre-reading time variation type pre-reading command, pre-reading time variation distribution table information command) is not sent from the main control board 4100, the special 1 unknown flag to prohibit special pre-reading effect is set (step S1473a) The reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 storage prefetching command at the time of prefetching at this time is set to the special count 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure prefetching execution determination processing is ended. When the special one unknown flag is already set, the set state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the process of step S1474a rewrites the value of the special one unknown count to the value of the new holding ball number. Do. Always update the new unknown pending process in memory order so that it becomes the cancellation condition of the pre-reading effect prohibition.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives another prefetch command from main control board 4100 when the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is “prefetch available” (Yes in step S 1472 a). It is determined whether "6903H" (ambiguous command) has been received as the pre-reading time change distribution table information command among them (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification described above. When the ambiguous command has been received, that is, when the pre-reading time-variation distribution table information command of “6903 H” has been received (Yes in step S1475 a), the special figure prefetch execution determination process is ended.

  Further, peripheral control MPU 4150a does not receive the ambiguous command, that is, when it receives the pre-reading time change distribution table information command of the mode value other than "03H" (No in step S1475a), It is determined whether the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). When the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special view prefetch effect execution is prohibited, so the special view prefetch execution determination process is ended.

  Further, when the special control unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is under permission to execute special look-ahead effect, and thus performs special-picture look-ahead effect execution instructing special effect look-ahead effect execution A flag is set (step S1477a), and the special drawing prefetch execution determination process is ended. When the special view look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a special view look-ahead effect in the special view look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the settings you need to

  In the process of step S1471, when the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is not a target for special symbol 1, that is, a command targeted for special symbol 2 (No in step S1471) The processing of step S1472b to step S1477b to be executed is one in which the target is changed to the special symbol 2 from the processing of step S1472a to step S1477a targeting the special symbol 1 described above.

  In the special view pre-reading execution judgment processing, when the non-pre-reading special reading 1 special pattern 1 (2) storage pre-reading command is received, the unknown flag of the special design of the object is set, until the corresponding unknown pending is digested Prohibit pre-reading effects of special symbols. Therefore, even when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Also, even when the received prefetch time-variation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetching effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect prohibition control of the second modification, the hold at the time of power interruption received as power recovery information at power on is regarded as “unknown holding”, and the pre-reading effect is not executed even after power recovery. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold where pre-read information (specific game information) is not transmitted and there is a hold where the peripheral control MPU 4150a can not specify the pre-read determination result), the special symbol of interest until the unknown hold is digested. Do not perform pre-reading effect in. Then, if the unknown hold is digested, the pre-reading effect is permitted. For this reason, the hold at power failure (unknown hold) does not affect the pre-reading effect after the power recovery. Moreover, since the prohibition period of pre-reading effect is set for each special symbol according to the unknown holding number, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pre-read effect and the decrease in interest of the game.

  In addition, when the prefetching special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding suspension is also set as "unknown suspension", and the prefetching in the target special symbol until the unknown suspension is digested Since the effect is prohibited, it is possible to provide the player with more appropriate pre-reading effect by executing this pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading determination prohibition control at the time of state transition by the main control board 4100 described above. For example, when transitioning from the short-time state to the non-short-time state at the time of state transition described above, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the pre-read determination if the number of times the short-time state is maintained remains four or less. Therefore, the special symbol 2 suspension occurring in the prefetching determination prohibition period is not prefetched and determined, and is recognized as the unknown suspension by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-time-short state after state transition until the special symbol 2 suspension (upper limit four pieces) generated during the remaining four variation time-short state is digested. And, in the pachinko machine 1 of special symbol 2 preferential digestion, after the state transition, the special symbol 2 of unknown suspension is digested before the special symbol 1. As described above, the hold generated during the four changes immediately before the transition state is not targeted for the pre-reading determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the hold on the peripheral control board 4140 side is received until the prepayment effect is possible until the hold is digested. Also by not setting it as the target of the pre-reading effect, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the pre-reading effect during a period in which a defect easily occurs. In addition, the hold that occurs in the non-time-short state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, since the pre-reading effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, it is for special symbol 2 suspension. Therefore, the execution of the pre-reading effect on the side of the special symbol 1 in the non-short time state is not hindered.

  Further, in the second modification, the pre-reading effect prohibition control for an unknown hold other than the power-off hold is performed at the timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving non-prereading special symbol 1 (2) memory pre-reading command (unknown command) at the time of pre-reading, unknown holding corresponding to the unknown command is digested and fluctuation start It is released at the timing of As described above, when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, the pre-reading effect is prohibited, and the pre-read effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown hold is digested. Therefore, it is possible to execute more accurate pre-read effect prohibition control, and it is possible to suppress the pre-read effect and the deterioration of the game entertainment.

  Further, as described in the first modification, the pre-reading effect prohibition control at the time of power on may not be targeted at the time of clearing the RAM. In this case, a determination process for confirming reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-mentioned input unknown flag setting process (FIG. 82), and after that the RAM clear command is received (RAM clear) It is sufficient to end the input unknown flag setting process without executing the process of. Normally, although the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, it does not read out from the received command storage area 4150 cac in order to share the control at the time of RAM clear and at the time of power on. In this way, by controlling to allow the pre-reading effect when the RAM is cleared, unnecessary pre-reading effect prohibition can be eliminated, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game and to provide an appropriate pre-reading effect. .

  Further, in the first modification and the second modification, an ambiguous command (prefetching time variation distribution table information command of mode value “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the pending with pre-read occurrence that has occurred If it is, it is not targeted for pre-reading effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the pre-reading effect may be prohibited in response to the occurrence of the non-specific hit (small hit) in the high probability state. Specifically, in the above-mentioned special view prefetch execution determination process (FIG. 84), when a prefetch with read special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H” Added a process of determining whether or not the symbol type pre-reading command (status value "66H") of ")" has been received, and a process of determining whether or not the current probability state is the high probability state when received. If the command is received and the command is received and it is in the high probability state, the processes of steps S1473a and S1474a may be executed. Here, the type information of the small hit is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 at the pre-reading stage. Some small hit types include those that return high probability states to low probability states (normal probability states). If pre-reading effect is performed even after the occurrence of a small hit with a trigger to transition to such a low probability state occurs, it will occur after the small hit hold, and it will be a big hit judgment at the time of prefetching in the high probability state An event may occur in which the suspension determination is a deviation determination at the start of fluctuation in a low probability state which is triggered by the small hit. At this time, if the hit effect is performed by the pre-reading effect, the actual fluctuation result (not to mention) may not only disappoint the player's expectation significantly but also cause a distrust in the game effect. Therefore, even if the prefetch command with prefetch is received, when the symbol type prefetch command “6650H” of small hit is received in the high probability state, the fluctuation start time determined by the result of the small hit (pending Prohibits pre-reading effects until). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game and a distrust of the player's performance due to the excessive (incorrect) pre-reading effect being executed with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and also the pre-reading effect Can increase the reliability of

[19-2-3. When the big hit game starts (preread information clear)]
By the way, the pre-reading effect is prohibited because the pre-reading judgment is not executed by the main control MPU 4100a, while the pre-reading effect is prohibited by the main control MPU 4100a, but the pre-writing occurrence already stored at the time of the big hit started Prefetching information includes prefetching information according to the prefetching determination, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform prefetching effects. However, since the gaming state after the big hit that is digested at the start of the big hit start (variation start) may be different from the gaming state at the time of predetermination judgment (the variation pattern table is different), On the other hand, there is a risk that the pre-reading effect will not be appropriate. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 with regard to the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the pre-reading effect information set based on the hold information at the time of the big hit By doing this, it is possible to prevent in advance the occurrence of troubles in which appropriate pre-reading effects are not performed. The control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart of an example of the jackpot display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-mentioned effect control process (FIG. 49).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes a big hit opening display process according to the big hit start command (step S1710). Next, a big hit display process is performed to display that the big winning opening 2003 is opened on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and display effects (for example, round display etc.) during the big hit gaming state (step S1720). After that, the big hit ending display processing which performs the ending production of big hit game state is executed (step S1730), after updating the processing selective flag to 0 (step S1740), it ends big hit display processing.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart of an example of the jackpot opening display process. The big hit opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the above-described big hit display process (FIG. 85).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the big hit opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the process of step S1411 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) described above. Then, if the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a produces effect information (prior to advance) corresponding to the prefetch command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The notification mode is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150 cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 are set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. I am performing presentation control. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the advance notification mode on the condition that the function (pre-notification mode identifiability setting means) can set the pre-reading effect information (pre-notification mode) to be specified in the predetermined storage area. It also has a function (pre-notification mode non-specifiable setting means) for setting non-identification. The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode or effect pattern selection table when the pre-read command is received.

  Next, the periphery control MPU 4150a sets the rendering information corresponding to the prefetch command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae again based on the rendering mode and rendering pattern selection table switched and set with the present big hit as a trigger (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes display setting processing for setting an opening display such as fanfare effect (step S1715), and ends the big hit opening display processing. Thereafter, when the big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit middle display process (step S1720 in FIG. 85) is executed.

  As described above, in the big hit opening display process, the effect display indicating the big hit start is performed, and the pre-reading effect information of the hold stored at the big hit start is according to the play state at the hold occurrence according to the big hit game state Can be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the pre-read effect information selected under the normal probability state at the time of holding occurrence, and re-reads pre-read effect information again under the high probability state switched on the occasion of a big hit. Reselect. In addition, it is the pre-reading effect information which becomes the target of the effect information clear processing of step S1712, and it is pre-reading command information received from the main control board 4100 (held ball number, pre-reading presence / absence, symbol type, fluctuation pattern, fluctuation type) Since the distribution table is held, the effect information setting processing based on the hold information can be reset in the effect information setting process of the next step S1713. In addition, the timing of reset is not limited to the time of the big hit start. For example, it may be reset before the big hit round finalization effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect according to the situation with respect to the suspension at the start of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the pre-reading effect and the interest of the game.

  In addition, the target of the above-mentioned presentation information clear process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the time of the big hit start. Even if the prefetching special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is received from the main control board 4100 and another prefetch command is received, the change in the number of pending reservations (hold when last received) When the number information of the present reception is increased to four, etc. although the number information is zero, the stored effect information of the hold may be cleared at this time. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when satisfied is regarded as the target of the effect information clear process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent the defect of the pre-reading effect for the hold in advance, and the pre-read is appropriate It leads to offer of the production.

  In addition, the control which does not perform the special figure prefetch effect performed by the periphery control board side mentioned above is good also as control which does not perform special figure prefetch determination by the main control board side.

[20. Transition to production mode]
By the way, in the above-mentioned reception command analysis process (FIG. 48, FIG. 79, FIG. 81), when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404. The fluctuation pattern reception flag is set in the process of. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting a special figure tuning effect including variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state among the plurality, the variation pattern received from the main control board 4100 and the effect pattern corresponding to the win information (stop symbol of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, The determination of the executability of the preliminary rendering, the preliminary rendering mode, the presence or absence of the extension, and the like are determined, and the rendering of the rendering pattern is executed as the special figure tuning effect.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 87, an example of the effect transition in the probability variation time short state in which the number of times of time reduction is applied 64 times will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition in the probable short time state. When the game state enters a certain variation time short state, the special figure tuning effect (time reduction effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed up to 30 times from 1 to 30 times, and the special figure for the specific B effect mode is executed after 31 times. A tuning effect (certainly positive decision effect) is performed. In the special figure tuning production in the specific A production mode, continuous production is performed whether or not the time saving state is continued in the fluctuation of 10 times, 20 times, and 30 times, and normal production is performed in other fluctuation. Be done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of times of time reduction, and sets a variation pattern (a normal effect pattern, a continuous effect pattern, a probability variation confirmed effect pattern) according to the number of times of variation to the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of provided tables according to the number of times of time reduction (the number of times of lottery game execution in the time shortened state). At this time, the table to be selected differs according to the number of times of time saving. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 87, in the probability short time state, the fluctuation pattern which becomes 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, 21 to 29 times of time reduction is selected from the table for which the regular presentation pattern is set, and the time reduction is 10 times. The variation patterns to be 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the variation patterns to be 31 or more times in time reduction are selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmation effect pattern is set. Further, in the continuation effect pattern, a success effect pattern in which the time saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time saving state ends are provided. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time-savings (number of times of fluctuation) by following the received fluctuation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of times of time-savings (number of times of fluctuation). Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even when data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as at the time of power failure. The effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 87, the periphery control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode for 1 to 30 times in time reduction, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode for 31 or more times in time reduction.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 88, an effect mode transition process will be described, in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition is executed based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of effect mode transition processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition processing is executed, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted at the start of fluctuation is received from the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned decorative symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is an example of the transition from the specific A effect mode to the specific B effect mode of FIG. 87 described above.

  The surrounding area control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a short time state and continuous effect (success or failure) is executed every predetermined number of times, and continuous success effect is performed three times as transition condition to the specific B effect mode. Effect mode. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not currently in the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the effect mode transition process is ended.

  Then, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives, from the main control board 4100, a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a success effect pattern among the continuous effect patterns. It is determined whether or not it has been (step S1752). Then, if the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), it updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether the number of successes after the update has reached three (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process is ended. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A-effect mode to the special-B effect mode (step S1755). Thereafter, the effect mode transition process is ended. In addition, the count of the number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared when the special A effect mode is ended.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when the specific variation pattern command is received a predetermined number of times from the main control MPU 4100a, and according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a It is possible to appropriately determine the transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in the series of effect modes (specific A effect mode) without grasping the number of changes in. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can always determine the appropriate effect based on the command received from the main control board 4100 side where the game information is backed up, so even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared at power off etc. It is possible to carry out the appropriate rendition at the time of electricity.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be practiced in various forms within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko gaming machines, such as slot machines or the like The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine (one for playing a slot game using a game ball) in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 outer frame 3 main body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 192 handle relay terminal board 400 operation unit (operation section)
470 Upper dish side liquid crystal display device 650 Hit ball launcher 740 Prize ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error canceler)
860b error LED indicator 1100 game area 1900 game board side liquid crystal display 4100 main control board (main control means, game control board, game control section, special game state occurrence means, game state transition means, variable winning device control means, effect Information transmission means, gaming machine related information transmission means, lottery game execution means, specific game execution means, prior determination means, game information transmission means, start information storage means, pattern selection table change means, benefit grant means, prize assistance means, game Pattern selection means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Dispensing Control Board (Dispensing Control Board, Dispensing Control Unit)
4120 Payout control unit 4120a Payout control MPU
4140 peripheral control board (effect control means, effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selection means, effect content selection means, effect selection information change means, effect execution timing determination means, specific effect Execution means, predetermined effect execution means, predetermined effect control means, gaming information reception means, pre-processing execution means, advance effect execution means, advance notification means, advance notification mode identifiable possible setting device, advance notification mode unidentifiable setting device)
4150 peripheral control unit 4160 liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 lamp drive substrate 4180 motor drive substrate

Claims (1)

Start information is acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition, selection of types of lottery and dynamic display is performed based on the acquired start information, and dynamic display of the selected type is made executable, It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a special gaming state in which the player is given a benefit based on the result of the lottery,
Holding storage means for storing the start information for each satisfaction of the predetermined condition, with a predetermined upper limit as a limit until the dynamic display is started;
Start information storage means for temporarily storing the start information;
The start information for starting the dynamic display is temporarily stored from the hold storage means to the start information storage means at the start of the dynamic display, and the start information is stored based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. Dynamic display time determination means for executing selection of lottery and type of dynamic display;
The start information is temporarily stored in the start information storage means before the dynamic display is started, and the type of the dynamic display is selected based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. A prior determination means for determining in advance the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
Selection of the type of the dynamic display in the dynamic display time determination means and the prior determination means is executed using a common process.
A game machine characterized by initializing start information stored in the start information storage means after executing the lottery by the prior determination means.